Inline abbrev lookup
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texi
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
b3adc24a 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
b8891f8d 24@set CSKY
49fa1e15 25@set H8300
0285c67d 26@set HPPA
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
fa1477dc 34@set PDP11
2a60a7a8
AM
35@set POWERPC
36@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15 37@set Renesas
b4cbbe8f 38@set S/390
49fa1e15
AM
39@set SPU
40@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 41@set WIN32
e0001a05 42@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
43@end ifset
44@c man end
45
9160ea82
AM
46@ifnottex
47@dircategory Software development
48@direntry
252b5132 49* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
50@end direntry
51@end ifnottex
252b5132 52
0e9517a9 53@copying
e49e529d
JM
54This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
55@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
56@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
57@end ifset
58version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 59
b3adc24a 60Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 61
cf055d54 62Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 63under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
64or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
65with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
66Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 67section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 68@end copying
252b5132
RH
69@iftex
70@finalout
71@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 72@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 73@titlepage
71ba23f6 74@title The GNU linker
252b5132 75@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
76@subtitle @code{ld}
77@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
78@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
79@end ifset
252b5132
RH
80@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
81@author Steve Chamberlain
82@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
83@page
84
85@tex
86{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
87\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
88\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 89\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
90\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
91}
92\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
93@end tex
94
95@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 96@c man begin COPYRIGHT
b3adc24a 97Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 98
0285c67d 99Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 100under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
101or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
102with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
103Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 104section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 105@c man end
252b5132 106
252b5132
RH
107@end titlepage
108@end iftex
4ecceb71 109@contents
252b5132
RH
110@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
111
84ec0e6d 112@ifnottex
252b5132 113@node Top
71ba23f6 114@top LD
e49e529d
JM
115This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
116@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
117@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
118@end ifset
119version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 120
cf055d54 121This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
122Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
123in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 124
252b5132
RH
125@menu
126* Overview:: Overview
127* Invocation:: Invocation
128* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
129@ifset GENERIC
130* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
131@end ifset
132@ifclear GENERIC
133@ifset H8300
134* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
135@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
136@ifset Renesas
137* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132 138@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
139@ifset ARM
140* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
141@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
142@ifset M68HC11
143* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
144@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
145@ifset HPPA
146* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
147@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
148@ifset M68K
149* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
150@end ifset
833794fc
MR
151@ifset MIPS
152* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
153@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
154@ifset POWERPC
155* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
156@end ifset
157@ifset POWERPC64
158* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
159@end ifset
b4cbbe8f
AK
160@ifset S/390
161* S/390 ELF:: ld and S/390 ELF Support
162@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
163@ifset SPU
164* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
165@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
166@ifset TICOFF
167* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
168@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
169@ifset WIN32
170* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
171@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
172@ifset XTENSA
173* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
174@end ifset
252b5132
RH
175@end ifclear
176@ifclear SingleFormat
177* BFD:: BFD
178@end ifclear
179@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
180
181* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
182* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 183* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 184* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 185@end menu
84ec0e6d 186@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
187
188@node Overview
189@chapter Overview
190
191@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
192@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 193
0879a67a 194@ifset man
0285c67d 195@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 196ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
197@c man end
198
199@c man begin SEEALSO
200ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
201the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
202@file{ld}.
203@c man end
204@end ifset
205
206@c man begin DESCRIPTION
207
ff5dcc92 208@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 209their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 210compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 211
ff5dcc92 212@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
213a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
214to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
215
0285c67d
NC
216@ifset man
217@c For the man only
ece2d90e 218This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
219@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
220language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
221@end ifset
222
252b5132 223@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
224This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
225to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
226write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
227@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
228available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
229@end ifclear
230
231Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
232linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
233execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 234@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
235(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
236
0285c67d
NC
237@c man end
238
252b5132
RH
239@node Invocation
240@chapter Invocation
241
0285c67d
NC
242@c man begin DESCRIPTION
243
ff5dcc92 244The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
245and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
246you have many choices to control its behavior.
247
0285c67d
NC
248@c man end
249
252b5132
RH
250@ifset UsesEnvVars
251@menu
a05a5b64 252* Options:: Command-line Options
252b5132
RH
253* Environment:: Environment Variables
254@end menu
255
256@node Options
a05a5b64 257@section Command-line Options
252b5132
RH
258@end ifset
259
260@cindex command line
261@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
262
263@c man begin OPTIONS
264
252b5132
RH
265The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
266practice few of them are used in any particular context.
267@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 268For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
269object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
270link a file @code{hello.o}:
271
272@smallexample
273ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
274@end smallexample
275
ff5dcc92 276This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
277result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
278the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
279directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
280
ff5dcc92 281Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
282point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
283as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
284which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
285files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
286different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
287occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
288option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
289noted in the descriptions below.
290
291@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
292Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
293together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
294options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
295an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
296
297Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
298specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
299and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
300are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
301message @samp{No input files}.
302
36f63dca 303If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
304assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
305augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
306linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
307permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
308or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
309@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
310script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
311extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
312to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
313the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
314
315For options whose names are a single letter,
316option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
317whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
318option that requires them.
319
320For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 321precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 322@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 323this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 324only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
325@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
326name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
327output.
328
329Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
330option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
331immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
332@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
333Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
334accepted.
252b5132 335
36f63dca 336Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
a05a5b64 337(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command-line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
338prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
339compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
340
341@smallexample
2509a395 342 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
343@end smallexample
344
345This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
346silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
347may also arise when passing options that require values through a
348driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
349a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
350and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
351the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
352
353@smallexample
354 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
355@end smallexample
4e53152f 356
a05a5b64 357Here is a table of the generic command-line switches accepted by the GNU
4e53152f
NC
358linker:
359
ff5dcc92 360@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 361@include at-file.texi
dff70155 362
2509a395
SL
363@kindex -a @var{keyword}
364@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
365This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
366argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
367@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
368@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
369to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
370
7ee314fa
AM
371@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
372@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
373Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
374@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
375specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
376will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
377finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 378it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 379This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 380interface.
7ee314fa 381
252b5132
RH
382@ifclear SingleFormat
383@cindex binary input format
384@kindex -b @var{format}
385@kindex --format=@var{format}
386@cindex input format
387@cindex input format
388@item -b @var{input-format}
389@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
390@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
391file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 392@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 393that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 394configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 395to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
396default input format the most usual format on each machine.
397@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
398supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
399formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
400@xref{BFD}.
401
402You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
403binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
404linking object files of different formats), by including
405@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 406particular format.
252b5132
RH
407
408The default format is taken from the environment variable
409@code{GNUTARGET}.
410@ifset UsesEnvVars
411@xref{Environment}.
412@end ifset
413You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
414@code{TARGET};
415@ifclear man
416see @ref{Format Commands}.
417@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
418@end ifclear
419
420@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
421@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
422@cindex compatibility, MRI
423@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
424@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 425For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 426files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
427@ifclear man
428@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
429@end ifclear
430@ifset man
431the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
432@end ifset
433Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 434the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
435scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
436If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
437specified by any @samp{-L} options.
438
439@cindex common allocation
440@kindex -d
441@kindex -dc
442@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 443@item -d
252b5132
RH
444@itemx -dc
445@itemx -dp
446These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
447compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
448even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
449script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
450@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
451
7ee314fa
AM
452@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
453@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
454@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
455@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
456Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
457@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
458specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
459will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
460option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 461The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 462
abf874aa
CL
463@kindex --enable-non-contiguous-regions
464@item --enable-non-contiguous-regions
465This option avoids generating an error if an input section does not
466fit a matching output section. The linker tries to allocate the input
467section to subseque nt matching output sections, and generates an
468error only if no output section is large enough. This is useful when
469several non-contiguous memory regions are available and the input
470section does not require a particular one. The order in which input
471sections are evaluated does not change, for instance:
472
473@smallexample
474 MEMORY @{
475 MEM1 (rwx) : ORIGIN : 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x14
476 MEM2 (rwx) : ORIGIN : 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x40
477 MEM3 (rwx) : ORIGIN : 0x2000, LENGTH = 0x40
478 @}
479 SECTIONS @{
480 mem1 : @{ *(.data.*); @} > MEM1
481 mem2 : @{ *(.data.*); @} > MEM2
482 mem3 : @{ *(.data.*); @} > MEM2
483 @}
484
485 with input sections:
486 .data.1: size 8
487 .data.2: size 0x10
488 .data.3: size 4
489
490 results in .data.1 affected to mem1, and .data.2 and .data.3
491 affected to mem2, even though .data.3 would fit in mem3.
492@end smallexample
493
494This option is incompatible with INSERT statements because it changes
495the way input sections are mapped to output sections.
496
497@kindex --enable-non-contiguous-regions-warnings
498@item --enable-non-contiguous-regions-warnings
499This option enables warnings when
500@code{--enable-non-contiguous-regions} allows possibly unexpected
501matches in sections mapping, potentially leading to silently
502discarding a section instead of failing because it does not fit any
503output region.
504
252b5132
RH
505@cindex entry point, from command line
506@kindex -e @var{entry}
507@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 508@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
509@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
510Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
511program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
512named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
513and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
514base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
515@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
516and other ways of specifying the entry point.
517
b58f81ae
DJ
518@kindex --exclude-libs
519@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
520Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 521exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
522@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
523automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
524port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
525explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
526option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
527be treated as hidden.
528
e1c37eb5
DK
529@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
530@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
531Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
532should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
533into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
534may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
535used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
536the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
537match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
538command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
539of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
540regardless of this option.
541
252b5132
RH
542@cindex dynamic symbol table
543@kindex -E
544@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 545@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
546@item -E
547@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
548@itemx --no-export-dynamic
549When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
550option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
551all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
552set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
553
554If you do not use either of these options (or use the
555@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
556dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
557referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
558
559If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
560back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
561dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
562linking the program itself.
563
55255dae 564You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 565be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 566See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 567
8b747e1a
DK
568Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
569support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
570the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
571
36f63dca 572@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
573@cindex big-endian objects
574@cindex endianness
575@kindex -EB
576@item -EB
577Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
578
579@cindex little-endian objects
580@kindex -EL
581@item -EL
582Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 583@end ifclear
252b5132 584
2509a395
SL
585@kindex -f @var{name}
586@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
587@item -f @var{name}
588@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
589When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
590to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
591table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
592symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
593
594If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
595run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
596the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
597first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
598@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
599in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
600Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
601implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
a094d01f 602machine-specific performance.
252b5132
RH
603
604This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
605will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
606
2509a395
SL
607@kindex -F @var{name}
608@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 609@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 610@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
611When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
612the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
613of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
614on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
615
616If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
617run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
618dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
619filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
620found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
621used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
622@var{name}.
623
ff5dcc92 624Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 625toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
626object files.
627@ifclear SingleFormat
628The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 629@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 630@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
631environment variable.
632@end ifclear
633The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
634creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 635
3dbf70a2 636@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
637@kindex -fini=@var{name}
638@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
639When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
640executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
641address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
642the function to call.
643
252b5132
RH
644@kindex -g
645@item -g
646Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
647
2509a395
SL
648@kindex -G @var{value}
649@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 650@cindex object size
2509a395 651@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
652@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
653Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
654@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 655MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
656sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
657
658@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 659@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 660@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 661@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
662@itemx -soname=@var{name}
663When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
664the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
665which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
666linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
667field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
668
669@kindex -i
670@cindex incremental link
671@item -i
672Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
673
3dbf70a2 674@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
675@kindex -init=@var{name}
676@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
677When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
678executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
679of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
680function to call.
681
252b5132 682@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 683@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 684@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 685@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
686@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
687Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
688list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
689If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 690will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 691will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 692
ff5dcc92 693On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
694files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
695and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
696called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
697@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
698indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
699to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
700@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
701
702The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
703specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
704was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
705command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
706archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
707the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
708
ff5dcc92 709See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
710archives multiple times.
711
712You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
713
714@ifset GENERIC
715This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 716if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
717behaviour of the AIX linker.
718@end ifset
719
720@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 721@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 722@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 723@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 724@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
725Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
726for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
727option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
728in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
729on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 730@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
731order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
732how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
733option is specified.
252b5132 734
3aa2d05a
NC
735If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
736prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
737@samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
9c8ebd6a 738
252b5132
RH
739@ifset UsesEnvVars
740The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 741@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
742some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
743@end ifset
744
745The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
746@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
747at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
748
749@cindex emulation
750@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 751@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
752Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
753emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
754
755If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
756@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
757
758Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
759configured.
760
761@cindex link map
762@kindex -M
763@kindex --print-map
764@item -M
765@itemx --print-map
766Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
767information about the link, including the following:
768
769@itemize @bullet
770@item
3b83e13a 771Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
772@item
773How common symbols are allocated.
774@item
775All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
776which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
777@item
778The values assigned to symbols.
779
780Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
781involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
782have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
783linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
784of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
785the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
786linker script containing:
787
788@smallexample
789 foo = 1
790 foo = foo * 4
791 foo = foo + 8
792@end smallexample
793
794will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
795option is used:
796
797@smallexample
798 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
799 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
800 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
801@end smallexample
802
803See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
804scripts.
d2ef37eb 805
06ddcada
AM
806@item
807How GNU properties are merged.
d2ef37eb 808
06ddcada
AM
809When the linker merges input .note.gnu.property sections into one output
810.note.gnu.property section, some properties are removed or updated.
811These actions are reported in the link map. For example:
d2ef37eb
L
812
813@smallexample
814Removed property 0xc0000002 to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (not found)
815@end smallexample
816
06ddcada 817This indicates that property 0xc0000002 is removed from output when
d2ef37eb
L
818merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose property 0xc0000002 value
819is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, which doesn't have property 0xc0000002.
820
821@smallexample
06ddcada 822Updated property 0xc0010001 (0x1) to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (0x1)
d2ef37eb
L
823@end smallexample
824
06ddcada 825This indicates that property 0xc0010001 value is updated to 0x1 in output
d2ef37eb
L
826when merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value
827is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value is 0x1.
252b5132
RH
828@end itemize
829
035801ce
FS
830@cindex link map discarded
831@kindex --print-map-discarded
832@kindex --no-print-map-discarded
833@item --print-map-discarded
834@itemx --no-print-map-discarded
835Print (or do not print) the list of discarded and garbage collected sections
836in the link map. Enabled by default.
837
252b5132
RH
838@kindex -n
839@cindex read-only text
840@cindex NMAGIC
841@kindex --nmagic
842@item -n
843@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
844Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
845libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
846mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
847
848@kindex -N
849@kindex --omagic
850@cindex read/write from cmd line
851@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 852@item -N
252b5132
RH
853@itemx --omagic
854Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
855not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
856libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
857mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
858is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
859specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
860
861@kindex --no-omagic
862@cindex OMAGIC
863@item --no-omagic
864This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
865sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
866be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
867shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
868
869@kindex -o @var{output}
870@kindex --output=@var{output}
871@cindex naming the output file
872@item -o @var{output}
873@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 874Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
875option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
876script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
877
878@kindex -O @var{level}
879@cindex generating optimized output
880@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 881If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 882the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
883should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
884option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
885the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
886no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
887of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 888
387dd777
DP
889@kindex -plugin @var{name}
890@item -plugin @var{name}
891Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
892the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
893automatically added by the complier, when using link time
894optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
895wish.
896
897Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
898from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
899@command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
900those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
41f37a6f 901copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
387dd777 902based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
6c19b93b 903just copy in the newest one.
387dd777 904
26278bb8
UD
905@kindex --push-state
906@cindex push state governing input file handling
907@item --push-state
908The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
909flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
910restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
911
912The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
913@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
914@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
915@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
916@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
917@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
918
919One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
920used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
921listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
922something as follows:
923
924@smallexample
925-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
926@end smallexample
927
928@kindex --pop-state
929@cindex pop state governing input file handling
67cecaba 930@item --pop-state
26278bb8
UD
931Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
932flags governing input file handling.
933
a712da20
NC
934@kindex -q
935@kindex --emit-relocs
936@cindex retain relocations in final executable
937@item -q
938@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 939Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
940Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
941order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
942in larger executables.
943
dbab7a7b
NC
944This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
945
4f471f39
RS
946@kindex --force-dynamic
947@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
948@item --force-dynamic
949Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
950to VxWorks targets.
951
252b5132
RH
952@cindex partial link
953@cindex relocatable output
954@kindex -r
1049f94e 955@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 956@item -r
1049f94e 957@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 958Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 959turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
960linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
961magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
962@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 963@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
964If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
965linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
966constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
967
62bf86b4
HPN
968When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
969partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
970relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
971example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
972with input files in other formats at all.
973
252b5132
RH
974This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
975
976@kindex -R @var{file}
977@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
978@cindex symbol-only input
979@item -R @var{filename}
980@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
981Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
982relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
983to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
984programs. You may use this option more than once.
985
ff5dcc92 986For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 987followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 988the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
989
990@kindex -s
991@kindex --strip-all
992@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 993@item -s
252b5132
RH
994@itemx --strip-all
995Omit all symbol information from the output file.
996
997@kindex -S
998@kindex --strip-debug
999@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 1000@item -S
252b5132
RH
1001@itemx --strip-debug
1002Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
1003
a70f34c0
NC
1004@kindex --strip-discarded
1005@kindex --no-strip-discarded
1006@item --strip-discarded
1007@itemx --no-strip-discarded
1008Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
1009Enabled by default.
1010
252b5132
RH
1011@kindex -t
1012@kindex --trace
1013@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 1014@item -t
252b5132 1015@itemx --trace
4f4690cd
AM
1016Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them. If
1017@samp{-t} is given twice then members within archives are also printed.
1018@samp{-t} output is useful to generate a list of all the object files
1019and scripts involved in linking, for example, when packaging files for
1020a linker bug report.
252b5132
RH
1021
1022@kindex -T @var{script}
1023@kindex --script=@var{script}
1024@cindex script files
1025@item -T @var{scriptfile}
1026@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
1027Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 1028@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 1029@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
1030output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
1031the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
1032specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
1033options accumulate.
252b5132 1034
14be8564
L
1035@kindex -dT @var{script}
1036@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
1037@cindex script files
1038@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
1039@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
1040Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
1041
1042This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
1043processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
1044command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
1045@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
1046behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
1047command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
1048the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
1049@samp{gcc}).
1050
252b5132
RH
1051@kindex -u @var{symbol}
1052@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
1053@cindex undefined symbol
1054@item -u @var{symbol}
1055@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
1056Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
1057symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
1058modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
1059different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
1060option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
1061
0a618243
AB
1062If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
1063into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
1064undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
1065instead.
1066
1067@kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1068@cindex symbols, require defined
1069@cindex defined symbol
1070@item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1071Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
1072is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
1073is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
1074and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
1075@code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
1076can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
1077
252b5132
RH
1078@kindex -Ur
1079@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 1080@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
1081For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1082@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 1083turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
1084@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1085It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1086with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1087be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1088@samp{-r} for the others.
1089
c005eb9e
AB
1090@kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1091@cindex orphan sections
1092@cindex sections, orphan
1093@item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1094Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1095specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1096
1097@var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1098
1099@table @code
1100@item place
1101Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1102the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
d2732b69 1103@samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
c005eb9e
AB
1104
1105@item discard
1106All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1107@samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1108
1109@item warn
1110The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1111issue a warning.
1112
1113@item error
1114The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1115@end table
1116
1117The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1118
577a0623
AM
1119@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1120@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1121Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1122@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1123missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1124specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1125multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1126input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1127in a linker script.
a854a4a7 1128
252b5132
RH
1129@kindex -v
1130@kindex -V
1131@kindex --version
1132@cindex version
1133@item -v
1134@itemx --version
1135@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1136Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1137lists the supported emulations.
1138
1139@kindex -x
1140@kindex --discard-all
1141@cindex deleting local symbols
1142@item -x
1143@itemx --discard-all
1144Delete all local symbols.
1145
1146@kindex -X
1147@kindex --discard-locals
1148@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1149@item -X
252b5132 1150@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1151Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1152system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1153or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1154
1155@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1156@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1157@cindex symbol tracing
1158@item -y @var{symbol}
1159@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1160Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1161option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1162to prepend an underscore.
1163
1164This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1165don't know where the reference is coming from.
1166
1167@kindex -Y @var{path}
1168@item -Y @var{path}
1169Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1170for Solaris compatibility.
1171
1172@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1173@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1174The recognized keywords are:
1175@table @samp
1176
e6e2dfbd
AM
1177@item bndplt
1178Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1179
1180@item call-nop=prefix-addr
1181@itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1182@itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1183@itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1184Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1185to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1186@option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1187@option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1188@option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1189@option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1190Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1191
233a0083
L
1192@item cet-report=none
1193@itemx cet-report=warning
1194@itemx cet-report=error
1195Specify how to report the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT and
1196GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK properties in input .note.gnu.property
1197section. @option{cet-report=none}, which is the default, will make the
1198linker not report missing properties in input files.
1199@option{cet-report=warning} will make the linker issue a warning for
1200missing properties in input files. @option{cet-report=error} will make
1201the linker issue an error for missing properties in input files.
1202Note that @option{ibt} will turn off the missing
1203GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT property report and @option{shstk} will
1204turn off the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK property report.
1205Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1206
cd6d6c15 1207@item combreloc
e6e2dfbd
AM
1208@itemx nocombreloc
1209Combine multiple dynamic relocation sections and sort to improve
1210dynamic symbol lookup caching. Do not do this if @samp{nocombreloc}.
cd6d6c15 1211
b8871f35 1212@item common
e6e2dfbd
AM
1213@itemx nocommon
1214Generate common symbols with STT_COMMON type during a relocatable
1215link. Use STT_OBJECT type if @samp{nocommon}.
1216
1217@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1218Set the page size most commonly used to @var{value}. Memory image
1219layout will be optimized to minimize memory pages if the system is
1220using pages of this size.
b8871f35 1221
cd6d6c15 1222@item defs
97a232d7
NC
1223Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1224is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1225This option is the inverse of @samp{-z undefs}.
cd6d6c15 1226
e6e2dfbd
AM
1227@item dynamic-undefined-weak
1228@itemx nodynamic-undefined-weak
1229Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1230if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1231by symbol visibility or versioning. Do not make them dynamic if
1232@samp{nodynamic-undefined-weak}. If neither option is given, a target
1233may default to either option being in force, or make some other
1234selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic. Not all targets support
1235these options.
1236
6aa29e7b
JJ
1237@item execstack
1238Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1239
b039ef04
L
1240@item global
1241This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1242the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1243of subsequently loaded libraries.
1244
93ab9c0d
NC
1245@item globalaudit
1246This option is only meaningful when building a dynamic executable.
1247This option marks the executable as requiring global auditing by
1248setting the @code{DF_1_GLOBAUDIT} bit in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} dynamic
1249tag. Global auditing requires that any auditing library defined via
a05a5b64 1250the @option{--depaudit} or @option{-P} command-line options be run for
6c19b93b 1251all dynamic objects loaded by the application.
93ab9c0d 1252
e6e2dfbd
AM
1253@item ibtplt
1254Generate Intel Indirect Branch Tracking (IBT) enabled PLT entries.
1255Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1256
8df93cb5 1257@item ibt
e6e2dfbd
AM
1258Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in .note.gnu.property section
1259to indicate compatibility with IBT. This also implies @option{ibtplt}.
1260Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1261
cd6d6c15
NC
1262@item initfirst
1263This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1264It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1265before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1266the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1267the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1268objects.
1269
1270@item interpose
e6e2dfbd
AM
1271Specify that the dynamic loader should modify its symbol search order
1272so that symbols in this shared library interpose all other shared
1273libraries not so marked.
cd6d6c15 1274
5fa222e4
AM
1275@item lazy
1276When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1277dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1278the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1279Lazy binding is the default.
1280
cd6d6c15 1281@item loadfltr
e6e2dfbd 1282Specify that the object's filters be processed immediately at runtime.
cd6d6c15 1283
e6e2dfbd
AM
1284@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1285Set the maximum memory page size supported to @var{value}.
cd6d6c15 1286
e6e2dfbd
AM
1287@item muldefs
1288Allow multiple definitions.
b8871f35 1289
cd6d6c15 1290@item nocopyreloc
daf220f0
AM
1291Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1292defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
cd6d6c15
NC
1293
1294@item nodefaultlib
e6e2dfbd
AM
1295Specify that the dynamic loader search for dependencies of this object
1296should ignore any default library search paths.
cd6d6c15
NC
1297
1298@item nodelete
e6e2dfbd 1299Specify that the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
cd6d6c15
NC
1300
1301@item nodlopen
e6e2dfbd 1302Specify that the object is not available to @code{dlopen}.
cd6d6c15
NC
1303
1304@item nodump
e6e2dfbd 1305Specify that the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
cd6d6c15 1306
6aa29e7b
JJ
1307@item noexecstack
1308Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1309
e6e2dfbd
AM
1310@item noextern-protected-data
1311Don't treat protected data symbols as external when building a shared
1312library. This option overrides the linker backend default. It can be
1313used to work around incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1314generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1315module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1316i386 and x86-64.
8dfef1bd 1317
e6e2dfbd
AM
1318@item noreloc-overflow
1319Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1320relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1321overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
6aa29e7b 1322
cd6d6c15
NC
1323@item now
1324When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1325dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
e6e2dfbd
AM
1326when the shared library is loaded by dlopen, instead of deferring
1327function call resolution to the point when the function is first
1328called.
cd6d6c15
NC
1329
1330@item origin
e6e2dfbd 1331Specify that the object requires @samp{$ORIGIN} handling in paths.
cd6d6c15 1332
6aa29e7b 1333@item relro
e6e2dfbd 1334@itemx norelro
def5c83c
AM
1335Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object. This
1336specifies a memory segment that should be made read-only after
1337relocation, if supported. Specifying @samp{common-page-size} smaller
1338than the system page size will render this protection ineffective.
e6e2dfbd 1339Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment if @samp{norelro}.
6aa29e7b 1340
47acac12
L
1341@item separate-code
1342@itemx noseparate-code
1343Create separate code @code{PT_LOAD} segment header in the object. This
1344specifies a memory segment that should contain only instructions and must
1345be in wholly disjoint pages from any other data. Don't create separate
1346code @code{PT_LOAD} segment if @samp{noseparate-code} is used.
1347
e6e2dfbd
AM
1348@item shstk
1349Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK in .note.gnu.property section
1350to indicate compatibility with Intel Shadow Stack. Supported for
1351Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
24718e3b 1352
04c3a755 1353@item stack-size=@var{value}
e6e2dfbd 1354Specify a stack size for an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
04c3a755
NS
1355Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1356@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1357
e6e2dfbd
AM
1358@item text
1359@itemx notext
1360@itemx textoff
a6dbf402
L
1361Report an error if DT_TEXTREL is set, i.e., if the position-independent
1362or shared object has dynamic relocations in read-only sections. Don't
1363report an error if @samp{notext} or @samp{textoff}.
48580982 1364
97a232d7
NC
1365@item undefs
1366Do not report unresolved symbol references from regular object files,
1367either when creating an executable, or when creating a shared library.
1368This option is the inverse of @samp{-z defs}.
1369
cd6d6c15
NC
1370@end table
1371
ece2d90e 1372Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1373
1374@kindex -(
1375@cindex groups of archives
1376@item -( @var{archives} -)
1377@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1378The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1379either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1380
1381The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1382references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1383the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1384archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1385object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1386would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
5d3db3e2 1387they will all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
252b5132
RH
1388resolved.
1389
1390Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1391it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1392more archives.
1393
69da35b5
NC
1394@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1395@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1396@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1397@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1398Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1399recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1400and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1401the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1402behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1403so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1404restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1405
4a43e768
AM
1406@kindex --as-needed
1407@kindex --no-as-needed
1408@item --as-needed
1409@itemx --no-as-needed
1410This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1411on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1412the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1413on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1414needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1415emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1416non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1240be6b
AM
1417the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1418non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
ffa9430d
AM
1419Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1420the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1421needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1422from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1423
e56f61be
L
1424@kindex --add-needed
1425@kindex --no-add-needed
1426@item --add-needed
1427@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1428These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1429their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1430options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1431and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1432
252b5132
RH
1433@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1434@item -assert @var{keyword}
1435This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1436
1437@kindex -Bdynamic
1438@kindex -dy
1439@kindex -call_shared
1440@item -Bdynamic
1441@itemx -dy
1442@itemx -call_shared
1443Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1444for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1445default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1446for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1447multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1448@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1449
a1ab1d2a
UD
1450@kindex -Bgroup
1451@item -Bgroup
1452Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1453section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1454object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1455@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1456only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1457
252b5132
RH
1458@kindex -Bstatic
1459@kindex -dn
1460@kindex -non_shared
1461@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1462@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1463@itemx -dn
1464@itemx -non_shared
1465@itemx -static
1466Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1467platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1468variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1469may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1470library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1471option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1472option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1473shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1474references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1475libraries.
252b5132
RH
1476
1477@kindex -Bsymbolic
1478@item -Bsymbolic
1479When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1480definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1481for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1914e264
AM
1482within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1483platforms which support shared libraries.
252b5132 1484
40b36307
L
1485@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1486@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1487When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1488symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307 1489This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1914e264 1490libraries.
40b36307 1491
55255dae
L
1492@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1493@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1494Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1495typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1496global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1497within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1498to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1499in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1500which support shared libraries.
1501
1502The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1503scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1504
40b36307
L
1505@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1506@item --dynamic-list-data
1507Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1508
1509@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1510@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1511Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1512is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1513
0b8a70d9
L
1514@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1515@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1516Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1517
252b5132
RH
1518@kindex --check-sections
1519@kindex --no-check-sections
1520@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1521@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1522Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1523been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1524perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1525suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1526allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
a05a5b64 1527restored by using the command-line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1528Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1529force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1530option.
252b5132 1531
ddbb8a31
NC
1532@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1533@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1534@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1535@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1536This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1537by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1538command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1539output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1540input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1541specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1542follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1543behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1544
1545This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1546libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1547mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1548their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1549required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1550the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1551dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1552symbols.
1553
252b5132
RH
1554@cindex cross reference table
1555@kindex --cref
1556@item --cref
1557Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1558generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1559Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1560
1561The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1562easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1563sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1564symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1565definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1566where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1567symbol are listed.
252b5132 1568
4818e05f
AM
1569@cindex common allocation
1570@kindex --no-define-common
1571@item --no-define-common
1572This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1573The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1574@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1575
1576The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1577the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1578of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1579forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1580Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1581from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1582This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1583and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1584duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1585paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1586
7bdf4127
AB
1587@cindex group allocation in linker script
1588@cindex section groups
1589@cindex COMDAT
1590@kindex --force-group-allocation
1591@item --force-group-allocation
1592This option causes the linker to place section group members like
1593normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is the
1594default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used to
1595change the behaviour of a relocatable link (@samp{-r}). The script
1596command @code{FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION} has the same
1597effect. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1598
252b5132 1599@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1600@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1601@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1602Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1603address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1604times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1605limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1606context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1607symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1608constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
66bc8739
AM
1609using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1610@emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1611equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
252b5132
RH
1612
1613@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1614@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1615@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1616@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1617@itemx --no-demangle
1618These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1619and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1620present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1621underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1622mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1623different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1624to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1625demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1626is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1627
1628@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1629@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1630@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1631@item -I@var{file}
1632@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1633Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1634generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1635linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1636doing.
1637
9b8b325a
RF
1638@kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1639@item --no-dynamic-linker
1640When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1641linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1642executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1643entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1644
a70f34c0
NC
1645@kindex --embedded-relocs
1646@item --embedded-relocs
1647This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
a094d01f 1648that the relocs are stored in a target-specific section. This option
a70f34c0
NC
1649is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1650targets.
1651
3f0a5f17
ME
1652@kindex --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1653@item --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1654Do not allow multiple definitions with symbols included
1655in filename invoked by -R or --just-symbols
1656
7ce691ae 1657@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1658@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1659@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1660@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1661Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1662with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1663
252b5132
RH
1664@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1665@item --force-exe-suffix
1666Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1667
1668If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1669@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1670the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1671option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1672Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1673it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1674
1675@kindex --gc-sections
1676@kindex --no-gc-sections
1677@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1678@item --gc-sections
1679@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1680Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1681targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761 1682performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
0f088b2a
KT
1683@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1684collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1685implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
252b5132 1686
d5465ba2
AM
1687@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1688examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1689symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1690command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1691referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1692libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1693referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1694the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
b69e1ff3
CC
1695relocations. See @samp{--entry}, @samp{--undefined}, and
1696@samp{--gc-keep-exported}.
d5465ba2 1697
ac69cbc6 1698This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1699@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
b69e1ff3
CC
1700specified either by one of the options @samp{--entry},
1701@samp{--undefined}, or @samp{--gc-keep-exported} or by a @code{ENTRY}
1702command in the linker script.
ac69cbc6 1703
c17d87de
NC
1704@kindex --print-gc-sections
1705@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1706@cindex garbage collection
1707@item --print-gc-sections
1708@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1709List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1710printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1711collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1712default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1713be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1714line.
1715
22185505 1716@kindex --gc-keep-exported
1717@cindex garbage collection
1718@item --gc-keep-exported
1719When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1720collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1721default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1722executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1723collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1724Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1725it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1726ELF format targets.
1727
30824704
RM
1728@kindex --print-output-format
1729@cindex output format
1730@item --print-output-format
1731Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1732other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1733in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1734
3604cb1f
TG
1735@kindex --print-memory-usage
1736@cindex memory usage
1737@item --print-memory-usage
1738Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1739the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1740quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1741headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1742parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1743
1744@smallexample
1745Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1746 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1747 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1748@end smallexample
1749
252b5132
RH
1750@cindex help
1751@cindex usage
1752@kindex --help
1753@item --help
1754Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1755
ea20a7da
CC
1756@kindex --target-help
1757@item --target-help
a094d01f 1758Print a summary of all target-specific options on the standard output and exit.
ea20a7da 1759
2509a395
SL
1760@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1761@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1762Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
198204a7
NC
1763@option{-M} option, above. Specifying the empty string as @var{mapfile}
1764(that is, @code{-Map=}) causes the link map to be written to a file
1765named after the @var{output} file, with @code{.map} appended.
1766Specifying a directory as @var{mapfile} causes the link map to be
1767written into a file inside the directory. The name of the file is
1768again based upon the @var{output} filename with @code{.map} appended.
252b5132
RH
1769
1770@cindex memory usage
1771@kindex --no-keep-memory
1772@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1773@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1774symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1775instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1776necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1777while linking a large executable.
1778
1779@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1780@kindex -z defs
97a232d7 1781@kindex -z undefs
252b5132 1782@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1783@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1784Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1785is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1786The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1787behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1788libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1789
97a232d7
NC
1790The effects of this option can be reverted by using @code{-z undefs}.
1791
aa713662
L
1792@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1793@kindex -z muldefs
1794@item --allow-multiple-definition
1795@itemx -z muldefs
1796Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1797report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1798first definition will be used.
1799
b79e8c78 1800@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1801@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1802@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1803@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1804Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1805This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1806determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1807shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1808how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1809
903249d7
NC
1810The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1811referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1812an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1813a shared library.
1814
1815The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1816libraries specified at link time are that:
1817
1818@itemize @bullet
1819@item
1820A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1821that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1822resolvable at load time.
1823@item
1824There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1825symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1826
1827The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1828select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1829architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1830appropriate memset function.
1831@end itemize
b79e8c78 1832
31941635
L
1833@kindex --no-undefined-version
1834@item --no-undefined-version
1835Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1836it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1837will be issued instead.
1838
3e3b46e5
PB
1839@kindex --default-symver
1840@item --default-symver
1841Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1842exported symbols.
1843
1844@kindex --default-imported-symver
1845@item --default-imported-symver
1846Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1847imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1848
252b5132
RH
1849@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1850@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1851Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1852files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1853been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1854This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1855errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1856have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1857inappropriate.
1858
fe7929ce
AM
1859@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1860@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1861Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1862library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1863
252b5132
RH
1864@kindex --no-whole-archive
1865@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1866Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1867archive files.
1868
1869@cindex output file after errors
1870@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1871@item --noinhibit-exec
1872Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1873Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1874errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1875when it issues any error whatsoever.
1876
0a9c1c8e
CD
1877@kindex -nostdlib
1878@item -nostdlib
1879Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1880command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1881(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1882
252b5132 1883@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1884@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1885@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1886@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1887file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1888@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1889object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1890object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1891should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1892usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1893name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1894list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1895command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1896this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1897@end ifclear
1898
76359541
TP
1899@kindex --out-implib
1900@item --out-implib @var{file}
1901Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1902the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1903library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1904may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1905behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1906step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1907the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1908
36af4a4e
JJ
1909@kindex -pie
1910@kindex --pic-executable
1911@item -pie
1912@itemx --pic-executable
1913@cindex position independent executables
1914Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1915ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1916libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1917address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1918normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1919defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1920
252b5132
RH
1921@kindex -qmagic
1922@item -qmagic
1923This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1924
1925@kindex -Qy
1926@item -Qy
1927This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1928
1929@kindex --relax
1930@cindex synthesizing linker
1931@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1932@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1933@item --relax
28d5f677 1934@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1935An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1936@ifset GENERIC
1937This option is only supported on a few targets.
1938@end ifset
1939@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1940@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132 1941@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1942@ifset XTENSA
1943@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1944@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1945@ifset M68HC11
1946@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1947@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1948@ifset NIOSII
1949@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1950@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1951@ifset POWERPC
1952@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1953@end ifset
252b5132 1954
a094d01f 1955On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target-specific,
28d5f677
NC
1956global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1957addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1958synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1959instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1960
1961On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1962debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1963@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1964This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1965family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1966@end ifset
1967
1968@ifset GENERIC
1969On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1970but ignored.
1971@end ifset
1972
28d5f677
NC
1973On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1974@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1975
252b5132
RH
1976@cindex retaining specified symbols
1977@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1978@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1979@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1980@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1981Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1982discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1983symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1984@ifset GENERIC
1985(such as VxWorks)
1986@end ifset
1987where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1988run-time memory.
1989
1990@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1991or symbols needed for relocations.
1992
1993You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1994line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1995
1996@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1997@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1998@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1999@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 2000Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 2001linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 2002arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
c1b00498
MR
2003them to locate shared objects at runtime.
2004
2005The @option{-rpath} option is also used when locating shared objects which
2006are needed by shared objects explicitly included in the link; see the
2007description of the @option{-rpath-link} option. Searching @option{-rpath}
2008in this way is only supported by native linkers and cross linkers which
2009have been configured with the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
2010
2011If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an ELF executable, the
2012contents of the environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it
2013is defined.
252b5132 2014
ff5dcc92 2015The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
d8506323 2016SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
2017@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
2018runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
2019options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
2020gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 2021file systems.
252b5132 2022
ff5dcc92 2023For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 2024followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 2025the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
2026@end ifset
2027
2028@ifset GENERIC
2029@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
2030@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
2031@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
2032When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
2033happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
2034of the input files.
2035
2036When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
2037non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
2038shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 2039explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 2040specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 2041@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
2042either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
2043appearing multiple times.
2044
e680a6b6
NC
2045The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
2046directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
2047containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
2048and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
204964-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
2050
2051The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
2052@var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
2053supported.
2054
28c309a2
NC
2055This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
2056that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
2057is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
2058runtime linker would do.
2059
252b5132 2060The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 2061libraries:
d8e4137b 2062
252b5132
RH
2063@enumerate
2064@item
ff5dcc92 2065Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 2066@item
ff5dcc92
SC
2067Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
2068between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
2069specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
2070used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
2071at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
2072by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
2073the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 2074@item
e2a83dd0
NC
2075On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
2076@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
2077environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 2078@item
ff5dcc92
SC
2079On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
2080directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 2081@item
a1b8d843 2082For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 2083variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 2084@item
ec4eb78a
L
2085For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
2086@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
2087libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
2088@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
2089@item
252b5132
RH
2090The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
2091@item
d8e4137b
NC
2092For a linker for a Linux system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
2093exists, the list of directories found in that file. Note: the path
2094to this file is prefixed with the @code{sysroot} value, if that is
2095defined, and then any @code{prefix} string if the linker was
2096configured with the @command{--prefix=<path>} option.
2097@item
2098For a native linker on a FreeBSD system, any directories specified by
2099the @code{_PATH_ELF_HINTS} macro defined in the @file{elf-hints.h}
2100header file.
2101@item
2102Any directories specifed by a @code{SEARCH_DIR} command in the
2103linker script being used.
252b5132
RH
2104@end enumerate
2105
2106If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
2107warning and continue with the link.
2108@end ifset
2109
2110@kindex -shared
2111@kindex -Bshareable
2112@item -shared
2113@itemx -Bshareable
2114@cindex shared libraries
2115Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
2116and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 2117shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
2118undefined symbols in the link.
2119
252b5132 2120@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
2121@item --sort-common
2122@itemx --sort-common=ascending
2123@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
2124This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
2125ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
2126sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
2127eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
2128between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
2129specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 2130
2509a395
SL
2131@kindex --sort-section=name
2132@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
2133This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
2134patterns in the linker script.
2135
2509a395
SL
2136@kindex --sort-section=alignment
2137@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
2138This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2139patterns in the linker script.
2140
a70f34c0
NC
2141@kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2142@item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2143This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2144.dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2145post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2146
252b5132 2147@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 2148@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 2149Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
2150each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2151size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
2152
2153@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 2154@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 2155Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 2156output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 2157This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
2158certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2159cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2160that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2161support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2162input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2163more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 2164many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
2165
2166@kindex --stats
2167@item --stats
2168Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2169as execution time and memory usage.
2170
2509a395 2171@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
2172@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2173Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2174configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2175that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2176
a70f34c0
NC
2177@kindex --task-link
2178@item --task-link
2179This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2180file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2181
252b5132
RH
2182@kindex --traditional-format
2183@cindex traditional format
2184@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
2185For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2186the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
2187use the traditional format instead.
2188
2189@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 2190For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
2191symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2192full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2193@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 2194trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
2195combine duplicate entries.
2196
2509a395
SL
2197@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2198@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
2199Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2200address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2201times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2202line.
2203@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2204for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2205@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2206should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2207sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2208
2509a395
SL
2209@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2210@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2211@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 2212@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
2213@item -Tbss=@var{org}
2214@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2215@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2216Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 2217@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 2218
2509a395
SL
2219@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2220@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 2221@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
2222When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2223byte of the text segment.
258795f5 2224
9d5777a3
RM
2225@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2226@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2227@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2228When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2229the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2230text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2231
0d705e9f
AM
2232@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2233@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2234@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2235When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2236model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2237
560e09e9
NC
2238@kindex --unresolved-symbols
2239@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2240Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2241values for @samp{method}:
2242
2243@table @samp
2244@item ignore-all
da8bce14 2245Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
2246
2247@item report-all
da8bce14 2248Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
2249
2250@item ignore-in-object-files
2251Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2252ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2253
2254@item ignore-in-shared-libs
2255Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2256ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2257when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2258libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2259command line.
2260@end table
2261
2262The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2263by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2264
2265Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2266unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2267can change this to a warning.
2268
1715a13c
L
2269@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2270@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 2271@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 2272@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 2273Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 2274supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
2275the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2276argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
2277
2278@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2279@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 2280@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
2281Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2282used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 2283about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
2284is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2285see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2286use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2287symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2288@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 2289
7ce691ae 2290@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
2291@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2292@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2293@item --warn-common
2294Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 2295a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
2296but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2297you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 2298Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
2299warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2300
2301There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2302
2303@table @samp
2304@item int i = 1;
2305A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2306file.
2307
2308@item extern int i;
2309An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2310There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2311variable somewhere.
2312
2313@item int i;
2314A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2315variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2316The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2317single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2318size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2319a definition of the same variable.
2320@end table
2321
2322The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2323Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2324just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2325encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2326a common symbol.
2327
2328@enumerate
2329@item
2330Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2331definition for the symbol.
2332@smallexample
2333@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2334 overridden by definition
2335@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2336@end smallexample
2337
2338@item
2339Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2340the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2341except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2342@smallexample
2343@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2344 overriding common
2345@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2346@end smallexample
2347
2348@item
2349Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2350@smallexample
2351@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2352 of `@var{symbol}'
2353@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2354@end smallexample
2355
2356@item
2357Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2358@smallexample
2359@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2360 overridden by larger common
2361@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2362@end smallexample
2363
2364@item
2365Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2366the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2367encountered in a different order.
2368@smallexample
2369@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2370 overriding smaller common
2371@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2372@end smallexample
2373@end enumerate
2374
2375@kindex --warn-constructors
2376@item --warn-constructors
2377Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2378object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2379detect the use of global constructors.
2380
2381@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2382@item --warn-multiple-gp
2383Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2384This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2385Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2386section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2387of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2388base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2389base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2390bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2391large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2392values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2393option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2394
2395@kindex --warn-once
2396@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2397@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2398@item --warn-once
2399Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2400which refers to it.
2401
2402@kindex --warn-section-align
2403@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2404@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2405@item --warn-section-align
2406Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2407alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2408The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2409is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2410the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2411
a6dbf402
L
2412@kindex --warn-textrel
2413@item --warn-textrel
2414Warn if the linker adds DT_TEXTREL to a position-independent executable
2415or shared object.
8fdd7217 2416
a0c402a5
L
2417@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2418@item --warn-alternate-em
2419Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2420
560e09e9
NC
2421@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2422@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2423If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2424@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2425This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2426
2427@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2428@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2429This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2430it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2431
252b5132
RH
2432@kindex --whole-archive
2433@cindex including an entire archive
2434@item --whole-archive
2435For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2436@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2437in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2438files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2439library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2440library. This option may be used more than once.
2441
7ec229ce 2442Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2443about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2444Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2445list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2446your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2447
2509a395
SL
2448@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2449@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2450Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2451@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2452undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2453@var{symbol}.
2454
2455This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2456wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2457wishes to call the system function, it should call
2458@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2459
2460Here is a trivial example:
2461
2462@smallexample
2463void *
cc2f008e 2464__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2465@{
cc2f008e 2466 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2467 return __real_malloc (c);
2468@}
2469@end smallexample
2470
ff5dcc92 2471If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2472all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2473instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2474call the real @code{malloc} function.
2475
2476You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2477links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2478you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2479file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2480call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2481
4ea904ed
SH
2482Only undefined references are replaced by the linker. So, translation unit
2483internal references to @var{symbol} are not resolved to
2484@code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. In the next example, the call to @code{f} in
2485@code{g} is not resolved to @code{__wrap_f}.
2486
2487@smallexample
2488int
2489f (void)
2490@{
2491 return 123;
2492@}
2493
2494int
2495g (void)
2496@{
2497 return f();
2498@}
2499@end smallexample
2500
6aa29e7b 2501@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b 2502@kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
6aa29e7b 2503@item --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b
NC
2504@itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2505Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2506(@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2507section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
6aa29e7b 2508
e41b3a13
JJ
2509@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2510@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2511Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2512generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2513if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2514
6c1439be
L
2515@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2516@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2517@item --enable-new-dtags
2518@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2519This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2520systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2521@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2522and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2523If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2524created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2525those options are only available for ELF systems.
2526
2d643429 2527@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2528@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2529Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2530close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2531time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2532increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2533value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2534
fdc90cb4
JJ
2535@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2536@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2537Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2538@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2539new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2540the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
c8455dc9
NC
2541hash tables. The default depends upon how the linker was configured,
2542but for most Linux based systems it will be @code{both}.
fdc90cb4 2543
0ce398f1
L
2544@kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2545@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2546@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2547@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2548@item --compress-debug-sections=none
2549@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2550@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2551@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
9af89fba
NC
2552On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2553compressed using zlib.
2554
2555@option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2556sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2557DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2558instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2559also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2560sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2561
2562The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2563@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2564
2565Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2566sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2567for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2568uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2569
2570The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2571involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2572default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2573@option{--help} option.
0ce398f1 2574
35835446
JR
2575@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2576@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2577This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2578linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2579for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2580about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2581
4f9c04f7 2582Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 25831021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2584run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2585has been used.
2586
2587The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2588enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2589
c0065db7
RM
2590@kindex --build-id
2591@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2592@item --build-id
2593@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c 2594Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
6033bf41 2595or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
61e2488c
JT
2596unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2597@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2598@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2599@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2600the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2601string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2602@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2603is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2604
2605The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2606that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2607unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2608to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2609file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2610string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2611
2612Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2613@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2614@end table
2615
0285c67d
NC
2616@c man end
2617
36f63dca 2618@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2619
0285c67d
NC
2620@c man begin OPTIONS
2621
ff5dcc92 2622The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2623the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2624normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2625use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2626@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2627like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2628symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2629object file).
2630
2631In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
a05a5b64 2632support additional command-line options that are specific to the i386
252b5132
RH
2633PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2634values by either a space or an equals sign.
2635
ff5dcc92 2636@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2637
2638@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2639@item --add-stdcall-alias
2640If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2641as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2642[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2643
2644@kindex --base-file
2645@item --base-file @var{file}
2646Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2647addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2648@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2649[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2650
2651@kindex --dll
2652@item --dll
2653Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2654@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2655file.
bb10df36 2656[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2657
88183869
DK
2658@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2659@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2660@item --enable-long-section-names
2661@itemx --disable-long-section-names
56e6cf80 2662The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
88183869 2663the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
56e6cf80
NC
2664for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2665fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
88183869
DK
2666to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2667allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2668disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2669generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2670as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2671with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2672GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2673information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2674option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2675section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2676when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2677image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2678[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2679
252b5132
RH
2680@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2681@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2682@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2683@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2684If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2685do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2686only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2687resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2688undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2689@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2690to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2691warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2692import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2693to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2694feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2695@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2696mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2697[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2698
522f09cd
KT
2699@kindex --leading-underscore
2700@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2701@item --leading-underscore
2702@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2703For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2704in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2705disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2706
252b5132
RH
2707@cindex DLLs, creating
2708@kindex --export-all-symbols
2709@item --export-all-symbols
2710If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2711be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2712otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2713explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2714attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2715option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2716@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2717@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2718exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2719re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2720such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2721@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2722@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2723Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2724not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2725extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2726(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2727These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2728@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2729@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2730@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2731@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2732[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2733
2734@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2735@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2736Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2737exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2738[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2739
2927aaca
NC
2740@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2741@item --exclude-all-symbols
2742Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2743[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2744
252b5132
RH
2745@kindex --file-alignment
2746@item --file-alignment
2747Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2748file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2749512.
bb10df36 2750[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2751
2752@cindex heap size
2753@kindex --heap
2754@item --heap @var{reserve}
2755@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2756Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2757to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2758committed.
bb10df36 2759[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2760
2761@cindex image base
2762@kindex --image-base
2763@item --image-base @var{value}
2764Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2765the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2766is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2767your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2768other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2769for dlls.
bb10df36 2770[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2771
2772@kindex --kill-at
2773@item --kill-at
2774If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2775symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2776[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2777
26d2d8a2
BF
2778@kindex --large-address-aware
2779@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2780If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2781header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2782greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2783or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2784section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2785[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2786
f69a2f97
NC
2787@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2788@item --disable-large-address-aware
2789Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2790This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2791driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2792addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2793[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2794
252b5132
RH
2795@kindex --major-image-version
2796@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2797Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2798[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2799
2800@kindex --major-os-version
2801@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2802Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2803[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2804
2805@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2806@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2807Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2808[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2809
2810@kindex --minor-image-version
2811@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2812Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2813[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2814
2815@kindex --minor-os-version
2816@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2817Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2818[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2819
2820@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2821@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2822Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2823[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2824
2825@cindex DEF files, creating
2826@cindex DLLs, creating
2827@kindex --output-def
2828@item --output-def @var{file}
2829The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2830file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2831(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2832library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2833automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2834[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2835
b044cda1 2836@cindex DLLs, creating
b044cda1
CW
2837@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2838@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2839@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2840Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2841@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2842By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2843for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2844execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2845[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2846
2847@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2848@item --disable-auto-image-base
2849Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2850user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2851default.
bb10df36 2852[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2853
2854@cindex DLLs, linking to
2855@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2856@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2857When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2858search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2859@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2860between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2861uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2862@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2863[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2864
2865@kindex --enable-auto-import
2866@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e 2867Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
317ff008
EB
2868DATA imports from DLLs, thus making it possible to bypass the dllimport
2869mechanism on the user side and to reference unmangled symbol names.
2870[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2871
2872The following remarks pertain to the original implementation of the
2873feature and are obsolete nowadays for Cygwin and MinGW targets.
2874
2875Note: Use of the 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section
2876of the image file to be made writable. This does not conform to the
2877PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft.
4d8907ac 2878
e2a83dd0
NC
2879Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2880data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2881placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2882around a problem with consts that is described here:
2883http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2884
4d8907ac
DS
2885Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2886see this message:
0d888aac 2887
ece2d90e 2888"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2889documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2890
ece2d90e
NC
2891This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2892ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2893allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2894fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2895constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2896multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2897this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2898of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2899the warning, and exit.
2900
2901There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2902data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2903
2fa9fc65
NC
2904One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2905of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2906this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2907
c0065db7
RM
2908A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2909that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2910there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2911a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2912
2913@example
2914extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2915extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2916 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2917@end example
2918
2919or
2920
2921@example
2922extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2923extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2924 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2925@end example
2926
c0065db7 2927For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2928is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2929
2930@example
2931extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2932extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2933 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2934@end example
2935
c406afaf
NC
2936or
2937
2938@example
2939extern long long extern_ll;
2940extern_ll -->
2941 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2942@end example
2943
2fa9fc65 2944A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2945'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2946@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2947requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2948building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2949merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2950between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2951constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2952
2953Original:
2954@example
2955--foo.h
2956extern int arr[];
2957--foo.c
2958#include "foo.h"
2959void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2960 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2961@}
2962@end example
2963
2964Solution 1:
2965@example
2966--foo.h
2967extern int arr[];
2968--foo.c
2969#include "foo.h"
2970void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2971 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2972 volatile int *parr = arr;
2973 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2974@}
2975@end example
2976
2977Solution 2:
2978@example
2979--foo.h
2980/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2981#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2982 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2983#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2984#else
2985#define FOO_IMPORT
2986#endif
2987extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2988--foo.c
2989#include "foo.h"
2990void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2991 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2992@}
2993@end example
2994
c0065db7 2995A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2996library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2997for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2998functions).
b044cda1
CW
2999
3000@kindex --disable-auto-import
3001@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 3002Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 3003@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 3004[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 3005
2fa9fc65
NC
3006@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
3007@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
3008If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
3009that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
3010a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 3011environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 3012[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
3013
3014@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
3015@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
317ff008 3016Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 3017[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 3018
b044cda1
CW
3019@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
3020@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
3021Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 3022[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 3023
252b5132
RH
3024@kindex --section-alignment
3025@item --section-alignment
3026Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
3027addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 3028[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
3029
3030@cindex stack size
3031@kindex --stack
3032@item --stack @var{reserve}
3033@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 3034Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 3035to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 3036committed.
bb10df36 3037[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
3038
3039@kindex --subsystem
3040@item --subsystem @var{which}
3041@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
3042@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
3043Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
3044legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
3045@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
3046the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
3047@var{which}.
bb10df36 3048[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 3049
2f563b51
DK
3050The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
3051of the PE file header:
3052[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
3053
2d5c3743
NC
3054@kindex --high-entropy-va
3055@item --high-entropy-va
3056Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
3057(ASLR).
dc9bd8c9
HD
3058This option also implies @option{--dynamicbase} and
3059@option{--enable-reloc-section}.
2d5c3743 3060
2f563b51
DK
3061@kindex --dynamicbase
3062@item --dynamicbase
3063The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
3064randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
3065Vista for i386 PE targets.
dc9bd8c9 3066This option also implies @option{--enable-reloc-section}.
2f563b51
DK
3067
3068@kindex --forceinteg
3069@item --forceinteg
3070Code integrity checks are enforced.
3071
3072@kindex --nxcompat
3073@item --nxcompat
3074The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
3075This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
3076
3077@kindex --no-isolation
3078@item --no-isolation
3079Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
3080
3081@kindex --no-seh
3082@item --no-seh
3083The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
3084this image.
3085
3086@kindex --no-bind
3087@item --no-bind
3088Do not bind this image.
3089
3090@kindex --wdmdriver
3091@item --wdmdriver
3092The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 3093
2f563b51
DK
3094@kindex --tsaware
3095@item --tsaware
3096The image is Terminal Server aware.
3097
0cb112f7
CF
3098@kindex --insert-timestamp
3099@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
3100@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
3101Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
3102as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
3103other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
56e6cf80 3104will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
eeb14e5a
LZ
3105same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
3106can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
56e6cf80 3107that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
eeb14e5a 3108identically.
dc9bd8c9
HD
3109
3110@kindex --enable-reloc-section
3111@item --enable-reloc-section
3112Create the base relocation table, which is necessary if the image
3113is loaded at a different image base than specified in the PE header.
252b5132
RH
3114@end table
3115
0285c67d
NC
3116@c man end
3117
ac145307
BS
3118@ifset C6X
3119@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
3120
3121@c man begin OPTIONS
3122
3123The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
3124libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
3125all executables use an index of 0.
3126
3127@table @gcctabopt
3128
3129@kindex --dsbt-size
3130@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
56e6cf80 3131This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
ac145307
BS
3132or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
3133entries.
3134
3135@kindex --dsbt-index
3136@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
3137This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
3138to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
3139executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
3140@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
3141
fbd9ad90
PB
3142@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
3143The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
3144exidx entries in frame unwind info.
3145
ac145307
BS
3146@end table
3147
3148@c man end
3149@end ifset
3150
b8891f8d
AJ
3151@ifset CSKY
3152@subsection Options specific to C-SKY targets
3153
3154@c man begin OPTIONS
3155
3156@table @gcctabopt
3157
3158@kindex --branch-stub on C-SKY
3159@item --branch-stub
3160This option enables linker branch relaxation by inserting branch stub
3161sections when needed to extend the range of branches. This option is
3162usually not required since C-SKY supports branch and call instructions that
3163can access the full memory range and branch relaxation is normally handled by
3164the compiler or assembler.
3165
3166@kindex --stub-group-size on C-SKY
3167@item --stub-group-size=@var{N}
3168This option allows finer control of linker branch stub creation.
3169It sets the maximum size of a group of input sections that can
3170be handled by one stub section. A negative value of @var{N} locates
3171stub sections after their branches, while a positive value allows stub
3172sections to appear either before or after the branches. Values of
3173@samp{1} or @samp{-1} indicate that the
3174linker should choose suitable defaults.
3175
3176@end table
3177
3178@c man end
3179@end ifset
3180
93fd0973
SC
3181@ifset M68HC11
3182@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
3183
3184@c man begin OPTIONS
3185
3186The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
3187memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
3188
3189@table @gcctabopt
3190
3191@kindex --no-trampoline
3192@item --no-trampoline
3193This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
3194is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
3195instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
3196
3197@kindex --bank-window
3198@item --bank-window @var{name}
3199This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3200the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3201The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3202paging and addresses within the memory window.
3203
3204@end table
3205
3206@c man end
3207@end ifset
3208
7fb9f789
NC
3209@ifset M68K
3210@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3211
3212@c man begin OPTIONS
3213
3214The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3215when linking for 68K targets.
3216
3217@table @gcctabopt
3218
3219@kindex --got
3220@item --got=@var{type}
3221This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3222@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3223@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3224Info entry for @file{ld}.
3225
3226@end table
3227
3228@c man end
3229@end ifset
3230
833794fc
MR
3231@ifset MIPS
3232@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3233
3234@c man begin OPTIONS
3235
3236The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
8b10b0b3
MR
3237generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3238linking for MIPS targets.
833794fc
MR
3239
3240@table @gcctabopt
3241
3242@kindex --insn32
3243@item --insn32
3244@kindex --no-insn32
3245@itemx --no-insn32
3246These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3247generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3248or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
324932-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3250used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3251possible.
3252
8b10b0b3
MR
3253@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3254@item --ignore-branch-isa
3255@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3256@itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3257These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3258transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3259accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3260is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3261instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3262equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3263calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3264a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3265an error.
3266
3734320d
MF
3267@kindex --compact-branches
3268@item --compact-branches
3269@kindex --no-compact-branches
fa1477dc 3270@itemx --no-compact-branches
3734320d
MF
3271These options control the generation of compact instructions by the linker
3272in the PLT entries for MIPS R6.
3273
833794fc
MR
3274@end table
3275
3276@c man end
3277@end ifset
3278
fa1477dc
SC
3279
3280@ifset PDP11
3281@subsection Options specific to PDP11 targets
3282
3283@c man begin OPTIONS
3284
3285For the pdp11-aout target, three variants of the output format can be
3286produced as selected by the following options. The default variant
3287for pdp11-aout is the @samp{--omagic} option, whereas for other
3288targets @samp{--nmagic} is the default. The @samp{--imagic} option is
3289defined only for the pdp11-aout target, while the others are described
3290here as they apply to the pdp11-aout target.
3291
3292@table @gcctabopt
3293
3294@kindex -N
3295@item -N
3296@kindex --omagic
3297@itemx --omagic
3298
3299Mark the output as @code{OMAGIC} (0407) in the @file{a.out} header to
3300indicate that the text segment is not to be write-protected and
3301shared. Since the text and data sections are both readable and
3302writable, the data section is allocated immediately contiguous after
3303the text segment. This is the oldest format for PDP11 executable
3304programs and is the default for @command{ld} on PDP11 Unix systems
3305from the beginning through 2.11BSD.
3306
3307@kindex -n
3308@item -n
3309@kindex --nmagic
3310@itemx --nmagic
3311
3312Mark the output as @code{NMAGIC} (0410) in the @file{a.out} header to
3313indicate that when the output file is executed, the text portion will
3314be read-only and shareable among all processes executing the same
3315file. This involves moving the data areas up to the first possible 8K
3316byte page boundary following the end of the text. This option creates
3317a @emph{pure executable} format.
3318
3319@kindex -z
3320@item -z
3321@kindex --imagic
3322@itemx --imagic
3323
3324Mark the output as @code{IMAGIC} (0411) in the @file{a.out} header to
3325indicate that when the output file is executed, the program text and
3326data areas will be loaded into separate address spaces using the split
3327instruction and data space feature of the memory management unit in
3328larger models of the PDP11. This doubles the address space available
3329to the program. The text segment is again pure, write-protected, and
3330shareable. The only difference in the output format between this
3331option and the others, besides the magic number, is that both the text
3332and data sections start at location 0. The @samp{-z} option selected
3333this format in 2.11BSD. This option creates a @emph{separate
3334executable} format.
3335
3336@kindex --no-omagic
3337@item --no-omagic
3338
3339Equivalent to @samp{--nmagic} for pdp11-aout.
3340
3341@end table
3342
3343@c man end
3344@end ifset
3345
252b5132
RH
3346@ifset UsesEnvVars
3347@node Environment
3348@section Environment Variables
3349
0285c67d
NC
3350@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3351
560e09e9 3352You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
3353@ifclear SingleFormat
3354@code{GNUTARGET},
3355@end ifclear
3356@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 3357
36f63dca 3358@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
3359@kindex GNUTARGET
3360@cindex default input format
3361@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3362use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3363of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 3364@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
3365of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3366attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3367this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3368there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3369object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3370BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3371in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 3372@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
3373
3374@kindex LDEMULATION
3375@cindex default emulation
3376@cindex emulation, default
3377@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3378@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3379behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3380available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3381the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3382variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3383linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
3384
3385@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3386@cindex demangling, default
3387Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3388@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3389default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3390a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3391may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3392options.
3393
0285c67d
NC
3394@c man end
3395@end ifset
3396
252b5132
RH
3397@node Scripts
3398@chapter Linker Scripts
3399
3400@cindex scripts
3401@cindex linker scripts
3402@cindex command files
3403Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3404written in the linker command language.
3405
3406The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3407the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3408the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3409more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3410direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3411described below.
3412
3413The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3414yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
a05a5b64
TP
3415linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command-line option
3416to display the default linker script. Certain command-line options,
252b5132
RH
3417such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3418
3419You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3420line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3421default linker script.
3422
3423You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3424to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3425Linker Scripts}.
3426
3427@menu
3428* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3429* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3430* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3431* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3432* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3433* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3434* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3435* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3436* VERSION:: VERSION Command
3437* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3438* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3439@end menu
3440
3441@node Basic Script Concepts
3442@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3443@cindex linker script concepts
3444We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3445describe the linker script language.
3446
3447The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3448file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3449@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3450The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3451purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3452among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3453section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3454in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3455
3456Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3457also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 3458contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
3459the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3460A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3461area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3462loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3463which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3464of debugging information.
3465
3466Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3467first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3468the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3469@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3470section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3471same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3472is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3473(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3474based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3475RAM address would be the VMA.
3476
3477You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3478program with the @samp{-h} option.
3479
3480Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3481@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3482has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3483information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3484will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3485static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3486referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3487
3488You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3489program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3490option.
3491
3492@node Script Format
3493@section Linker Script Format
3494@cindex linker script format
3495Linker scripts are text files.
3496
3497You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3498either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3499symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3500generally ignored.
3501
3502Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3503If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3504otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3505double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3506file name.
3507
3508You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3509@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3510to whitespace.
3511
3512@node Simple Example
3513@section Simple Linker Script Example
3514@cindex linker script example
3515@cindex example of linker script
3516Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3517
3518The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3519@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3520memory layout of the output file.
3521
3522The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3523describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3524code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3525@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3526Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3527your input files.
3528
3529For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
35300x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3531linker script which will do that:
3532@smallexample
3533SECTIONS
3534@{
3535 . = 0x10000;
3536 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3537 . = 0x8000000;
3538 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3539 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3540@}
3541@end smallexample
3542
3543You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3544followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3545descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3546
252b5132
RH
3547The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3548sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3549counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3550other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3551current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3552incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3553@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3554
3555The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3556required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3557after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3558which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3559wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3560means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3561
3562Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3563@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3564@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3565
3566The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3567the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3568at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3569output section, the value of the location counter will be
3570@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3571effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3572immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3573
3574The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3575alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3576example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3577sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3578may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3579sections.
3580
3581That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3582
3583@node Simple Commands
3584@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3585@cindex linker script simple commands
3586In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3587
3588@menu
3589* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3590* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3591@ifclear SingleFormat
3592* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3593@end ifclear
3594
4a93e180 3595* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3596* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3597@end menu
3598
3599@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3600@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3601@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3602@cindex start of execution
3603@cindex first instruction
3604@cindex entry point
3605The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3606point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3607entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3608@smallexample
3609ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3610@end smallexample
3611
3612There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3613entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3614stopping when one of them succeeds:
3615@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3616@item
252b5132 3617the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3618@item
252b5132 3619the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3620@item
a094d01f 3621the value of a target-specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
8a758655 3622targets this is @code{start}, but PE- and BeOS-based systems for example
3ab904c4 3623check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3624@item
252b5132 3625the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3626@item
252b5132
RH
3627The address @code{0}.
3628@end itemize
3629
3630@node File Commands
36f63dca 3631@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3632@cindex linker script file commands
3633Several linker script commands deal with files.
3634
3635@table @code
3636@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3637@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3638@cindex including a linker script
3639Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3640be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3641with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
364210 levels deep.
3643
4006703d
NS
3644You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3645@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3646
252b5132
RH
3647@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3648@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3649@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3650@cindex input files in linker scripts
3651@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3652@cindex linker script input object files
3653The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3654in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3655
3656For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3657a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3658then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3659
3660In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3661script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3662
e3f2db7f
AO
3663In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3664with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3665located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
16171946
FS
3666for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying
3667@code{=} as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the
3668filename path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of
3669@samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
3670
3671If a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is not used then the linker will try to open
3672the file in the directory containing the linker script. If it is not
3673found the linker will then search the current directory. If it is still
3674not found the linker will search through the archive library search
3675path.
252b5132 3676
ff5dcc92 3677If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
a05a5b64 3678name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command-line argument
252b5132
RH
3679@samp{-l}.
3680
3681When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3682files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3683script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3684
3685@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3686@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3687@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3688@cindex grouping input files
3689The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3690files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3691new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
a05a5b64 3692in @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
252b5132 3693
b717d30e
JJ
3694@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3695@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3696@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3697This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3698commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3699as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3700with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3701when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3702@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3703and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3704setting afterwards.
3705
252b5132
RH
3706@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3707@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3708@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3709The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3710@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3711@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
a05a5b64 3712Line Options}). If both are used, the command-line option takes
252b5132
RH
3713precedence.
3714
3715You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3716output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3717
3718@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3719@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3720@cindex library search path in linker script
3721@cindex archive search path in linker script
3722@cindex search path in linker script
3723The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3724@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132 3725@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
a05a5b64 3726on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both
252b5132 3727are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
a05a5b64 3728the command-line option are searched first.
252b5132
RH
3729
3730@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3731@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3732@cindex first input file
3733The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3734that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3735though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3736when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3737first file.
3738@end table
3739
3740@ifclear SingleFormat
3741@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3742@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3743A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3744
3745@table @code
3746@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3747@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3748@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3749@cindex output file format in linker script
3750The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3751output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3752exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
a05a5b64 3753(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both are used, the command
252b5132
RH
3754line option takes precedence.
3755
3756You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
a05a5b64 3757formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command-line options.
252b5132
RH
3758This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3759desired endianness.
3760
3761If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3762will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3763output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3764used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3765
3766For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3767command:
3768@smallexample
3769OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3770@end smallexample
3771This says that the default format for the output file is
a05a5b64 3772@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command-line
252b5132
RH
3773option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3774format.
3775
3776@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3777@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3778@cindex input file format in linker script
3779The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3780files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3781This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
a05a5b64 3782(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
252b5132
RH
3783is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3784command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3785@end table
3786@end ifclear
3787
4a93e180
NC
3788@node REGION_ALIAS
3789@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3790@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3791@cindex region alias
3792@cindex region names
3793
3794Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3795@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3796
3797@smallexample
3798REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3799@end smallexample
3800
3801The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3802memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3803to memory regions. An example follows.
3804
3805Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3806memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3807that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3808non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3809access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3810read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3811sections:
3812
3813@itemize @bullet
3814@item
3815@code{.text} program code;
3816@item
3817@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3818@item
3819@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3820@item
3821@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3822@end itemize
3823
3824The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3825part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3826output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3827systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3828@code{C}:
3829@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3830@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3831@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3832@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3833@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3834@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3835@end multitable
3836The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3837loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3838the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3839the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3840
3841The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3842includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3843memory layout:
3844@smallexample
3845INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3846
3847SECTIONS
3848 @{
3849 .text :
3850 @{
3851 *(.text)
3852 @} > REGION_TEXT
3853 .rodata :
3854 @{
3855 *(.rodata)
3856 rodata_end = .;
3857 @} > REGION_RODATA
3858 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3859 @{
3860 data_start = .;
3861 *(.data)
3862 @} > REGION_DATA
3863 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3864 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3865 .bss :
3866 @{
3867 *(.bss)
3868 @} > REGION_BSS
3869 @}
3870@end smallexample
3871
3872Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3873regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3874variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3875@table @code
3876@item A
3877Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3878@smallexample
3879MEMORY
3880 @{
3881 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3882 @}
3883
3884REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3885REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3886REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3887REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3888@end smallexample
3889@item B
3890Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3891into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3892@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3893@smallexample
3894MEMORY
3895 @{
3896 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3897 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3898 @}
3899
3900REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3901REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3902REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3903REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3904@end smallexample
3905@item C
3906Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3907@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3908initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3909system start into the @code{RAM}.
3910@smallexample
3911MEMORY
3912 @{
3913 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3914 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3915 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3916 @}
3917
3918REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3919REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3920REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3921REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3922@end smallexample
3923@end table
3924
3925It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3926@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3927necessary:
3928@smallexample
3929#include <string.h>
3930
3931extern char data_start [];
3932extern char data_size [];
3933extern char data_load_start [];
3934
3935void copy_data(void)
3936@{
3937 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3938 @{
3939 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3940 @}
3941@}
3942@end smallexample
3943
252b5132 3944@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3945@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3946There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3947
3948@table @code
3949@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3950@kindex ASSERT
3951@cindex assertion in linker script
3952Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3953with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3954
fd1c4238
NC
3955Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3956take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3957inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3958for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3959symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3960
3961@smallexample
3962 .stack :
3963 @{
3964 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3965 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3966 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3967 @}
3968@end smallexample
3969
3970will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3971PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3972can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3973
3974@smallexample
3975 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3976 .stack :
3977 @{
3978 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3979 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3980 @}
3981@end smallexample
3982
3983will work.
3984
252b5132
RH
3985@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3986@kindex EXTERN
3987@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3988Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3989symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3990modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3991each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3992command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3993
3994@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3995@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3996@cindex common allocation in linker script
3997This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3998to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3999output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
4000
4818e05f
AM
4001@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
4002@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
4003@cindex common allocation in linker script
4004This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
4005command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
4006to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
4007
7bdf4127
AB
4008@item FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
4009@kindex FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
4010@cindex group allocation in linker script
4011@cindex section groups
4012@cindex COMDAT
4013This command has the same effect as the
4014@samp{--force-group-allocation} command-line option: to make
4015@command{ld} place section group members like normal input sections,
4016and to delete the section groups even if a relocatable output file is
4017specified (@samp{-r}).
4018
53d25da6
AM
4019@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
4020@kindex INSERT
4021@cindex insert user script into default script
4022This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
4023augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
4024inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
4025@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
4026default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
4027sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
4028linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
4029insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
4030linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
4031default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
4032of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
4033to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
4034is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
4035
4036@smallexample
4037SECTIONS
4038@{
4039 OVERLAY :
4040 @{
4041 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
4042 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
4043 @}
4044@}
4045INSERT AFTER .text;
4046@end smallexample
4047
252b5132
RH
4048@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
4049@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
4050@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 4051This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
4052references among certain output sections.
4053
4054In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
4055using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
4056will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
4057errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
4058a function defined in the other section.
4059
4060The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 4061@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
4062an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
4063@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
4064names.
4065
cdf96953
MF
4066@item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
4067@kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
4068@cindex cross references
4069This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
4070references to one section from a list of other sections.
4071
4072The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
4073output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
4074a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
4075there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
4076must never call back.
4077
4078The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
4079The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
4080If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
4081the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
4082status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
4083names, not input section names.
4084
252b5132
RH
4085@ifclear SingleFormat
4086@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
4087@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
4088@cindex machine architecture
4089@cindex architecture
4090Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
4091of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
4092architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
4093the @samp{-f} option.
4094@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
4095
4096@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
4097@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
4098This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
4099@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
4100in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
4101@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
4102@end table
4103
4104@node Assignments
4105@section Assigning Values to Symbols
4106@cindex assignment in scripts
4107@cindex symbol definition, scripts
4108@cindex variables, defining
4109You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 4110the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
4111
4112@menu
4113* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 4114* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 4115* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 4116* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 4117* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
4118@end menu
4119
4120@node Simple Assignments
4121@subsection Simple Assignments
4122
4123You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
4124
4125@table @code
4126@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
4127@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
4128@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
4129@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
4130@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
4131@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
4132@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
4133@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
4134@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
4135@end table
4136
4137The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
4138@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
4139defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
4140
4141The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 4142may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
4143
4144The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
4145
4146Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
4147
4148You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
4149statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
4150section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
4151
4152The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
4153expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
4154
4155Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
4156assignments may be used:
4157
4158@smallexample
4159floating_point = 0;
4160SECTIONS
4161@{
4162 .text :
4163 @{
4164 *(.text)
4165 _etext = .;
4166 @}
156e34dd 4167 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
4168 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4169@}
4170@end smallexample
4171@noindent
4172In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
4173zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
4174the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
4175defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
4176upward to a 4 byte boundary.
4177
eb8476a6
MR
4178@node HIDDEN
4179@subsection HIDDEN
4180@cindex HIDDEN
4181For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
4182exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4183
4184Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
4185@code{HIDDEN}:
4186
4187@smallexample
4188HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
4189SECTIONS
4190@{
4191 .text :
4192 @{
4193 *(.text)
4194 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
4195 @}
4196 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
4197 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4198@}
4199@end smallexample
4200@noindent
4201In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
4202
252b5132
RH
4203@node PROVIDE
4204@subsection PROVIDE
4205@cindex PROVIDE
4206In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
4207only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
4208the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
4209@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
4210@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
4211@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
4212@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
4213@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4214
4215Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
4216@smallexample
4217SECTIONS
4218@{
4219 .text :
4220 @{
4221 *(.text)
4222 _etext = .;
4223 PROVIDE(etext = .);
4224 @}
4225@}
4226@end smallexample
4227
4228In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
4229underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
4230the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
4231underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
4232If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
4233linker will use the definition in the linker script.
4234
b0daac83
NC
4235Note - the @code{PROVIDE} directive considers a common symbol to be
4236defined, even though such a symbol could be combined with the symbol
4237that the @code{PROVIDE} would create. This is particularly important
4238when considering constructor and destructor list symbols such as
4239@samp{__CTOR_LIST__} as these are often defined as common symbols.
4240
7af8e998
L
4241@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4242@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4243@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4244Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
4245hidden and won't be exported.
4246
73ae6183
NC
4247@node Source Code Reference
4248@subsection Source Code Reference
4249
4250Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
4251intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
4252a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
4253symbol that does not have a value.
4254
4255Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
4256transform names in the source code into different names when they are
4257stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
4258prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
4259mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
4260of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
4261variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
4262linker script variable might be referred to as:
4263
4264@smallexample
4265 extern int foo;
4266@end smallexample
4267
4268But in the linker script it might be defined as:
4269
4270@smallexample
4271 _foo = 1000;
4272@end smallexample
4273
4274In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
4275transformation has taken place.
4276
4277When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
4278things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
4279in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
4280second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
4281table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
4282contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
4283value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
4284
4285@smallexample
4286 int foo = 1000;
4287@end smallexample
4288
10bf6894 4289creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
4290holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
4291number 1000 is initially stored.
4292
4293When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
4294first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4295memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4296So:
4297
4298@smallexample
4299 foo = 1;
4300@end smallexample
4301
4302looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4303associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4304address. Whereas:
4305
4306@smallexample
4307 int * a = & foo;
4308@end smallexample
4309
10bf6894 4310looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
4311and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4312the variable @samp{a}.
4313
4314Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4315the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4316an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4317
4318@smallexample
4319 foo = 1000;
4320@end smallexample
4321
4322creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4323the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4324address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4325linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4326access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4327
4328Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4329you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4330use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4331section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4332linker script contains these declarations:
4333
4334@smallexample
4335@group
4336 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
a5e406b5 4337 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
73ae6183
NC
4338 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4339@end group
4340@end smallexample
4341
4342Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4343
4344@smallexample
4345@group
4346 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 4347
73ae6183
NC
4348 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4349@end group
4350@end smallexample
4351
4352Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
5707d2ad
NC
4353Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4354arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4355
4356@smallexample
4357@group
4358 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4359
4360 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4361@end group
4362@end smallexample
4363
4364Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4365operators.
73ae6183 4366
252b5132 4367@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 4368@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
4369@kindex SECTIONS
4370The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4371into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4372
4373The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4374@smallexample
4375SECTIONS
4376@{
4377 @var{sections-command}
4378 @var{sections-command}
4379 @dots{}
4380@}
4381@end smallexample
4382
4383Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4384
4385@itemize @bullet
4386@item
4387an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4388@item
4389a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4390@item
4391an output section description
4392@item
4393an overlay description
4394@end itemize
4395
4396The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4397@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4398those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4399understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4400the layout of the output file.
4401
4402Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4403below.
4404
4405If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4406linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4407section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4408input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4409example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4410in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4411
4412@menu
4413* Output Section Description:: Output section description
4414* Output Section Name:: Output section name
4415* Output Section Address:: Output section address
4416* Input Section:: Input section description
4417* Output Section Data:: Output section data
4418* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4419* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4420* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4421* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4422@end menu
4423
4424@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 4425@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
4426The full description of an output section looks like this:
4427@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4428@group
7e7d5768 4429@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 4430 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 4431 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
4432 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4433 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4434 @{
4435 @var{output-section-command}
4436 @var{output-section-command}
4437 @dots{}
abc9061b 4438 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4439@end group
4440@end smallexample
4441
4442Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4443
4444The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4445name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
4446The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4447the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
4448The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4449
4450Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4451
4452@itemize @bullet
4453@item
4454a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4455@item
4456an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4457@item
4458data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4459@item
4460a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4461@end itemize
4462
4463@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 4464@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
4465@cindex name, section
4466@cindex section name
4467The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4468meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4469support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4470must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4471example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4472output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4473names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4474quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4475characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4476commas must be quoted.
4477
4478The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4479Discarding}.
4480
4481@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 4482@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
4483@cindex address, section
4484@cindex section address
4485The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
4486address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4487is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4488
4489If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4490section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4491to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4492alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4493contained within the output section.
4494
4495The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4496
4497@itemize @bullet
4498@item
4499If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4500is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4501in that region.
4502
4503@item
4504If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4505regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4506section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4507be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4508
4509@item
4510If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4511the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4512counter.
4513@end itemize
4514
4515@noindent
4516For example:
4517
252b5132
RH
4518@smallexample
4519.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4520@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4521
252b5132
RH
4522@noindent
4523and
ea5cae92 4524
252b5132
RH
4525@smallexample
4526.text : @{ *(.text) @}
4527@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4528
252b5132
RH
4529@noindent
4530are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4531@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4532counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
4533counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4534input sections.
252b5132
RH
4535
4536The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4537For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4538so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4539do something like this:
4540@smallexample
4541.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4542@end smallexample
4543@noindent
4544This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4545aligned upward to the specified value.
4546
4547Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
4548location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4549sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
4550
4551@node Input Section
36f63dca 4552@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
4553@cindex input sections
4554@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4555The most common output section command is an input section description.
4556
4557The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4558You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4559in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4560map the input files into your memory layout.
4561
4562@menu
4563* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4564* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4565* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4566* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4567* Input Section Example:: Input section example
4568@end menu
4569
4570@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 4571@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
4572@cindex input section basics
4573An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4574by a list of section names in parentheses.
4575
4576The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4577describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4578
4579The most common input section description is to include all input
4580sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4581include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4582@smallexample
4583*(.text)
4584@end smallexample
4585@noindent
18625d54 4586Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
8f1732fc 4587@cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
18625d54
CM
4588of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4589match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4590example:
252b5132 4591@smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4592EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4593@end smallexample
4594@noindent
4595will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4596and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4597placed inside the section list, for example:
4598@smallexample
b4346c09 4599*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 4600@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4601@noindent
4602The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4603two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4604more than one section, as described below.
252b5132
RH
4605
4606There are two ways to include more than one section:
4607@smallexample
4608*(.text .rdata)
4609*(.text) *(.rdata)
4610@end smallexample
4611@noindent
4612The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4613@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
4614first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4615they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
4616@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4617@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4618
8f1732fc
AB
4619When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4620is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4621immediately following section, for example:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4622@smallexample
4623*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4624@end smallexample
4625@noindent
4626will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4627@file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4628from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4629exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
8f1732fc 4630could be modified to:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4631@smallexample
4632*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4633@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4634@noindent
4635Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4636before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4637all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4638@smallexample
4639EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4640@end smallexample
a5bf7d4f 4641
252b5132
RH
4642You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4643You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4644needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4645@smallexample
4646data.o(.data)
4647@end smallexample
4648
ae17ab41
CM
4649To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4650of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4651
4652Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4653
4654@smallexample
4655@group
4656SECTIONS @{
4657 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4658 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4659@}
4660@end group
4661@end smallexample
4662
4663In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4664input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4665@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4666@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4667whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4668
967928e9
AM
4669You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4670matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4671with no whitespace around the colon.
4672
4673@table @samp
4674@item archive:file
4675matches file within archive
4676@item archive:
4677matches the whole archive
4678@item :file
4679matches file but not one in an archive
4680@end table
4681
4682Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4683wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4684single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4685@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4686within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4687also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4688other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4689from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4690command.
4691
252b5132
RH
4692If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4693the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4694commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4695@smallexample
4696data.o
4697@end smallexample
4698
967928e9
AM
4699When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4700and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4701characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4702name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4703did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4704though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4705@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4706the archive search path.
4707
4708@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4709@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4710@cindex input section wildcards
4711@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4712@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4713@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4714In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4715name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4716
4717The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4718pattern for the file name.
4719
4720The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4721
4722@table @samp
4723@item *
4724matches any number of characters
4725@item ?
4726matches any single character
4727@item [@var{chars}]
4728matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4729character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4730@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4731@item \
4732quotes the following character
4733@end table
4734
4735When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4736will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4737Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4738exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4739@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4740a @samp{/} character.
4741
4742File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4743specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4744does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4745
4746If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4747appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4748will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4749sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4750@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4751@smallexample
4752.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4753.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4754@end smallexample
4755
bcaa7b3e 4756@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4757Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4758in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4759this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4760pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4761@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4762into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4763
bcaa7b3e 4764@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
9a24a276
AM
4765@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4766@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into descending order of
4767alignment before placing them in the output file. Placing larger
4768alignments before smaller alignments can reduce the amount of padding
4769needed.
bcaa7b3e 4770
02ecc8e9 4771@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
9a24a276
AM
4772@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is also similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4773@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into ascending
4774numerical order of the GCC init_priority attribute encoded in the
4775section name before placing them in the output file. In
4776@code{.init_array.NNNNN} and @code{.fini_array.NNNNN}, @code{NNNNN} is
4777the init_priority. In @code{.ctors.NNNNN} and @code{.dtors.NNNNN},
4778@code{NNNNN} is 65535 minus the init_priority.
02ecc8e9 4779
bcaa7b3e
L
4780@cindex SORT
4781@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4782
4783When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4784can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4785
4786@enumerate
4787@item
4788@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4789It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4790sections have the same name.
4791@item
4792@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4793It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4794sections have the same alignment.
4795@item
c0065db7 4796@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4797treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4798@item
4799@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4800is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4801@item
4802All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4803@end enumerate
4804
a05a5b64 4805When both command-line section sorting option and linker script
bcaa7b3e 4806section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
a05a5b64 4807takes precedence over the command-line option.
bcaa7b3e
L
4808
4809If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
a05a5b64 4810command-line option will make the section sorting command to be
bcaa7b3e
L
4811treated as nested sorting command.
4812
4813@enumerate
4814@item
4815@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4816@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4817@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4818@item
4819@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4820@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4821@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4822@end enumerate
4823
4824If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
a05a5b64 4825command-line option will be ignored.
bcaa7b3e 4826
eda680f8 4827@cindex SORT_NONE
a05a5b64 4828@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command-line
eda680f8
L
4829section sorting option.
4830
252b5132
RH
4831If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4832@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4833precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4834
4835This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4836files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4837sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4838The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4839with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4840linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4841@smallexample
4842@group
4843SECTIONS @{
4844 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4845 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4846 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4847 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4848@}
4849@end group
4850@end smallexample
4851
4852@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4853@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4854@cindex common symbol placement
4855@cindex uninitialized data placement
4856A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4857file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4858linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4859named @samp{COMMON}.
4860
4861You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4862other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4863particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4864input files are placed in another section.
4865
4866In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4867@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4868@smallexample
4869.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4870@end smallexample
4871
4872@cindex scommon section
4873@cindex small common symbols
4874Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4875example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4876symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4877different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4878the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4879symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4880to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4881locations.
4882
4883@cindex [COMMON]
4884You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4885notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4886@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4887
4888@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4889@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4890@cindex KEEP
4891@cindex garbage collection
4892When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4893it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4894This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4895with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4896@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4897
4898@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4899@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4900The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4901to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4902start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4903@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4904follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4905@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4906@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4907All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4908files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4909
4910@smallexample
4911@group
4912SECTIONS @{
4913 outputa 0x10000 :
4914 @{
4915 all.o
4916 foo.o (.input1)
4917 @}
36f63dca
NC
4918@end group
4919@group
252b5132
RH
4920 outputb :
4921 @{
4922 foo.o (.input2)
4923 foo1.o (.input1)
4924 @}
36f63dca
NC
4925@end group
4926@group
252b5132
RH
4927 outputc :
4928 @{
4929 *(.input1)
4930 *(.input2)
4931 @}
4932@}
4933@end group
a1ab1d2a 4934@end smallexample
252b5132 4935
cbd0eecf
L
4936If an output section's name is the same as the input section's name
4937and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
4938automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
4939__stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section. These
4940indicate the start address and end address of the output section
4941respectively. Note: most section names are not representable as
4942C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.} character.
4943
252b5132 4944@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4945@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4946@cindex data
4947@cindex section data
4948@cindex output section data
4949@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4950@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4951@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4952@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4953@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4954You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4955@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4956an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4957parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4958value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4959counter.
4960
4961The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4962store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4963bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4964stored.
4965
4966For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4967of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4968@smallexample
4969BYTE(1)
4970LONG(addr)
4971@end smallexample
4972
4973When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4974same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4975target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4976@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4977@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4978
4979If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4980which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4981When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4982true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4983endianness of the first input object file.
4984
36f63dca 4985Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4986between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4987@smallexample
4988SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4989@end smallexample
4990whereas this will work:
4991@smallexample
4992SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4993@end smallexample
4994
252b5132
RH
4995@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4996@cindex holes, filling
4997@cindex unspecified memory
4998You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4999current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
5000otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
5001gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 5002with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
5003necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
5004point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
5005than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
5006different parts of an output section.
5007
5008This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 5009value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 5010@smallexample
563e308f 5011FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
5012@end smallexample
5013
5014The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 5015section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
5016part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
5017entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 5018precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 5019expression.
252b5132
RH
5020
5021@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 5022@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
5023There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
5024commands.
5025
5026@table @code
5027@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
5028@cindex input filename symbols
5029@cindex filename symbols
5030@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
5031The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
5032The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
5033file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
5034the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
5035
5036This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
5037normally used for any other object file format.
5038
5039@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
5040@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
5041@cindex constructors, arranging in link
5042@item CONSTRUCTORS
5043When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
5044unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
5045destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
5046arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
5047automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
5048For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
5049linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
5050@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
5051ignored for other object file formats.
5052
5053The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
5054constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
5055Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
5056the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
5057first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
5058of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
5059compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
5060formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
5061@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
5062the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
5063destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
5064@code{exit}.
5065
5066For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
5067arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
5068addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
5069and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
5070linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
5071runtime code expects to see.
5072
5073@smallexample
5074 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
5075 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
5076 *(.ctors)
5077 LONG(0)
5078 __CTOR_END__ = .;
5079 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
5080 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
5081 *(.dtors)
5082 LONG(0)
5083 __DTOR_END__ = .;
5084@end smallexample
5085
5086If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
5087which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
5088are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
5089are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
5090command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
5091@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
5092@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
5093@samp{*(.dtors)}.
5094
5095Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
5096and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
5097need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
5098scripts.
5099
5100@end table
5101
5102@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 5103@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
5104@cindex discarding sections
5105@cindex sections, discarding
5106@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
5107The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
5108This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
5109may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 5110@smallexample
49c13adb 5111.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
5112@end smallexample
5113@noindent
5114will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
5115@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
5116sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
5117space in an output section will also create the output section. So
5118too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
5119space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
5120@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
5121@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
5122This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 5123
a0976ea4 5124The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
5125on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
5126symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
5127the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
5128section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
5129
5130@cindex /DISCARD/
5131The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
5132input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
5133section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
5134
a2e098c3
NC
5135Note, sections that match the @samp{/DISCARD/} output section will be
5136discarded even if they are in an ELF section group which has other
5137members which are not being discarded. This is deliberate.
5138Discarding takes precedence over grouping.
5139
252b5132 5140@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 5141@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
5142@cindex output section attributes
5143We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
5144like this:
0c71d759 5145
252b5132 5146@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 5147@group
7e7d5768 5148@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 5149 [AT(@var{lma})]
3bbec4bd 5150 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
5151 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
5152 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
5153 @{
5154 @var{output-section-command}
5155 @var{output-section-command}
5156 @dots{}
562d3460 5157 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
5158@end group
5159@end smallexample
0c71d759 5160
252b5132
RH
5161We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
5162@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
5163remaining section attributes.
5164
a1ab1d2a 5165@menu
252b5132
RH
5166* Output Section Type:: Output section type
5167* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 5168* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 5169* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 5170* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
5171* Output Section Region:: Output section region
5172* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
5173* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
5174@end menu
5175
5176@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 5177@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
5178Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
5179parentheses. The following types are defined:
5180
5181@table @code
5182@item NOLOAD
5183The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
5184loaded into memory when the program is run.
5185@item DSECT
5186@itemx COPY
5187@itemx INFO
5188@itemx OVERLAY
5189These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
5190rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
5191marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
5192section when the program is run.
5193@end table
5194
5195@kindex NOLOAD
5196@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
5197@cindex loading, preventing
5198The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
5199the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
5200the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
5201@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 5202need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
5203@smallexample
5204@group
5205SECTIONS @{
5206 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
5207 @dots{}
5208@}
5209@end group
5210@end smallexample
5211
5212@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 5213@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 5214@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
5215@kindex AT(@var{lma})
5216@cindex load address
5217@cindex section load address
5218Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
5219@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
5220@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
5221specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
5222address is optional.
6bdafbeb 5223
ea5cae92
NC
5224The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
5225specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
5226takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
5227load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
5228region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
5229
5230If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
5231section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
5232load address:
5233
5234@itemize @bullet
5235@item
5236If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
5237the LMA address as well.
5238
5239@item
5240If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
5241
5242@item
5243Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
5244with the current section, and this region contains at least one
5245section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
5246VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
5247the last section in the located region.
5248
5249@item
5250If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
5251that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
5252
5253@item
5254If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
5255section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
5256@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5257
5258@cindex ROM initialized data
5259@cindex initialized data in ROM
5260This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
5261example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
5262called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
5263@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
5264even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
5265uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
5266defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
5267counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
5268
5269@smallexample
5270@group
5271SECTIONS
5272 @{
5273 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 5274 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
5275 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
5276 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
5277 .bss 0x3000 :
5278 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
5279@}
5280@end group
5281@end smallexample
5282
5283The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
5284this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
5285the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
5286how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
5287script.
5288
5289@smallexample
5290@group
5291extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
5292char *src = &_etext;
5293char *dst = &_data;
5294
ea5cae92
NC
5295/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
5296while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 5297 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 5298
ea5cae92 5299/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
5300for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
5301 *dst = 0;
5302@end group
5303@end smallexample
5304
bbf115d3
L
5305@node Forced Output Alignment
5306@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
5307@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
5308@cindex forcing output section alignment
5309@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 5310You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
5311alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5312intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 5313
7e7d5768
AM
5314@node Forced Input Alignment
5315@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5316@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5317@cindex forcing input section alignment
5318@cindex input section alignment
5319You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5320SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5321sections, whether larger or smaller.
5322
0c71d759
NC
5323@node Output Section Constraint
5324@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5325@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5326@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5327@cindex constraints on output sections
5328You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5329of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5330read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5331@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5332
252b5132 5333@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 5334@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
5335@kindex >@var{region}
5336@cindex section, assigning to memory region
5337@cindex memory regions and sections
5338You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5339using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5340
5341Here is a simple example:
5342@smallexample
5343@group
5344MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5345SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5346@end group
5347@end smallexample
5348
5349@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 5350@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
5351@kindex :@var{phdr}
5352@cindex section, assigning to program header
5353@cindex program headers and sections
5354You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5355using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5356one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5357assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5358@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5359linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5360
5361Here is a simple example:
5362@smallexample
5363@group
5364PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5365SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5366@end group
5367@end smallexample
5368
5369@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 5370@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
5371@kindex =@var{fillexp}
5372@cindex section fill pattern
5373@cindex fill pattern, entire section
5374You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5375@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5376(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5377within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
5378alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5379necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 5380of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
5381an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5382fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 5383other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
5384pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5385expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
5386
5387You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 5388output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
5389
5390Here is a simple example:
5391@smallexample
5392@group
563e308f 5393SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
5394@end group
5395@end smallexample
5396
5397@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 5398@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
5399@kindex OVERLAY
5400@cindex overlays
5401An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5402are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5403the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5404copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5405required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5406can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5407than another.
5408
5409Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5410@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5411output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5412command is as follows:
5413@smallexample
5414@group
5415OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5416 @{
5417 @var{secname1}
5418 @{
5419 @var{output-section-command}
5420 @var{output-section-command}
5421 @dots{}
5422 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5423 @var{secname2}
5424 @{
5425 @var{output-section-command}
5426 @var{output-section-command}
5427 @dots{}
5428 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5429 @dots{}
abc9061b 5430 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
5431@end group
5432@end smallexample
5433
5434Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5435section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5436section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 5437those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
5438except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5439sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5440
abc9061b
CC
5441The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5442the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5443
252b5132
RH
5444The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5445addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5446memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5447whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5448and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5449and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5450
56dd11f0
NC
5451If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5452references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5453the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5454sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5455@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
5456
5457For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 5458provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
5459defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5460@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5461the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5462within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5463symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5464
5465At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5466the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5467
5468Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5469@code{SECTIONS} construct.
5470@smallexample
5471@group
5472 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5473 @{
5474 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5475 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5476 @}
5477@end group
5478@end smallexample
5479@noindent
5480This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5481address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5482@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 5483following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
5484@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5485@code{__load_stop_text1}.
5486
5487C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5488like the following.
5489
5490@smallexample
5491@group
5492 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5493 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5494 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5495@end group
5496@end smallexample
5497
5498Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5499everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5500example could have been written identically as follows.
5501
5502@smallexample
5503@group
5504 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5505 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5506 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 5507 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5508 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5509 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
5510 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5511@end group
5512@end smallexample
5513
5514@node MEMORY
36f63dca 5515@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
5516@kindex MEMORY
5517@cindex memory regions
5518@cindex regions of memory
5519@cindex allocating memory
5520@cindex discontinuous memory
5521The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5522memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5523
5524The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5525memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5526may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5527can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5528set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5529regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5530around to fit into the available regions.
5531
127fcdff
AB
5532A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5533however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5534specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5535@code{MEMORY} is:
252b5132
RH
5536@smallexample
5537@group
a1ab1d2a 5538MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5539 @{
5540 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5541 @dots{}
5542 @}
5543@end group
5544@end smallexample
5545
5546The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5547region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5548Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5549with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
5550must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5551add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 5552command.
252b5132
RH
5553
5554@cindex memory region attributes
5555The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5556whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5557not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5558@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5559section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5560the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5561them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5562
5563The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5564@table @samp
5565@item R
5566Read-only section
5567@item W
5568Read/write section
5569@item X
5570Executable section
5571@item A
5572Allocatable section
5573@item I
5574Initialized section
5575@item L
5576Same as @samp{I}
5577@item !
c09e9a8c 5578Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
5579@end table
5580
81c688d5 5581If an unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
252b5132 5582@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
81c688d5
NC
5583attribute reverses the test for the characters that follow, so that an
5584unmapped section will be placed in the memory region only if it does
5585not match any of the attributes listed afterwards. Thus an attribute
5586string of @samp{RW!X} will match any unmapped section that has either
5587or both of the @samp{R} and @samp{W} attributes, but only as long as
5588the section does not also have the @samp{X} attribute.
252b5132
RH
5589
5590@kindex ORIGIN =
5591@kindex o =
5592@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
5593The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5594the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5595cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5596abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5597@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
5598
5599@kindex LENGTH =
5600@kindex len =
5601@kindex l =
5602The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5603region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
5604be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5605@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
5606
5607In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5608available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5609and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5610linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5611is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5612or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5613explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5614region.
5615
5616@smallexample
5617@group
a1ab1d2a 5618MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5619 @{
5620 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5621 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5622 @}
5623@end group
5624@end smallexample
5625
5626Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5627specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5628@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5629a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5630output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5631was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5632the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5633output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5634region, the linker will issue an error message.
5635
3ec57632 5636It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 5637expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
5638@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5639
5640@smallexample
5641@group
c0065db7 5642 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
5643@end group
5644@end smallexample
5645
252b5132
RH
5646@node PHDRS
5647@section PHDRS Command
5648@kindex PHDRS
5649@cindex program headers
5650@cindex ELF program headers
5651@cindex program segments
5652@cindex segments, ELF
5653The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5654@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5655loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5656program with the @samp{-p} option.
5657
5658When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5659reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5660program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5661This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5662interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5663
5664The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5665in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5666precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5667the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5668not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5669
5670The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5671generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5672ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5673
5674This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5675@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5676
5677@smallexample
5678@group
5679PHDRS
5680@{
5681 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5682 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5683@}
5684@end group
5685@end smallexample
5686
5687The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5688of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5689header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5690with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5691must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5692is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5693
5694Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5695system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5696specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5697sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5698attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5699Section Phdr}.
5700
5701It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5702merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5703repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5704contain the section.
5705
5706If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5707then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5708not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5709convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5710placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5711default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5712segment at all.
5713
5714@kindex FILEHDR
5715@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5716You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5717the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5718The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5719file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5720include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5721segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5722these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5723
5724The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5725value of the keyword.
5726
5727@table @asis
5728@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5729Indicates an unused program header.
5730
5731@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5732Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5733the file.
5734
5735@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5736Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5737
5738@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5739Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5740found.
5741
5742@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5743Indicates a segment holding note information.
5744
5745@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5746A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5747ABI.
5748
5749@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5750Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5751
1a9ccd70
NC
5752@item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5753Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5754
252b5132
RH
5755@item @var{expression}
5756An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5757be used for types not defined above.
5758@end table
5759
5760You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5761in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5762@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5763Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5764output section attribute.
5765
5766The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5767which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5768explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5769an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5770header.
5771
5772Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5773headers used on a native ELF system.
5774
5775@example
5776@group
5777PHDRS
5778@{
5779 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5780 interp PT_INTERP ;
5781 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5782 data PT_LOAD ;
5783 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5784@}
5785
5786SECTIONS
5787@{
5788 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5789 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5790 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5791 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5792 @dots{}
5793 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5794 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5795 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5796 @dots{}
5797@}
5798@end group
5799@end example
5800
5801@node VERSION
5802@section VERSION Command
5803@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5804@cindex symbol versions
5805@cindex version script
5806@cindex versions of symbols
5807The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5808only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5809symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5810a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5811shared library.
5812
5813You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5814you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5815also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5816
5817The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5818@smallexample
5819VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5820@end smallexample
5821
5822The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5823Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5824version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5825version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5826version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5827scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5828library.
5829
5830The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5831examples.
5832
5833@smallexample
5834VERS_1.1 @{
5835 global:
5836 foo1;
5837 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5838 old*;
5839 original*;
5840 new*;
252b5132
RH
5841@};
5842
5843VERS_1.2 @{
5844 foo2;
5845@} VERS_1.1;
5846
5847VERS_2.0 @{
5848 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5849 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5850 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5851 "f(int, double)";
5852 @};
252b5132
RH
5853@} VERS_1.2;
5854@end smallexample
5855
5856This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5857version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5858The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5859a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5860of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5861symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5862is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5863in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5864However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5865name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5866
5867Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5868depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5869to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5870
5871Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5872depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5873and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5874
5875When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5876specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5877unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5878unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5879somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5880wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5881wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5882set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5883ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5884
5885The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5886they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5887could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5888However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5889
0f6bf451 5890Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5891in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5892symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5893won't.
5894
5895@smallexample
7c9c73be 5896@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5897@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5898
252b5132
RH
5899When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5900symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5901requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5902shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5903loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5904linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5905application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5906way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5907all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5908search for each symbol reference.
5909
5910The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5911doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5912that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5913functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5914the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5915required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5916that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5917versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5918the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5919
5920There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5921first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5922source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5923script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5924maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5925@smallexample
5926__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5927@end smallexample
5928@noindent
5929in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5930be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5931The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5932@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5933takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5934
5935The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5936function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5937an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5938version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5939linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5940
5941To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5942source file. Here is an example:
5943
5944@smallexample
5945__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5946__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5947__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5948__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5949@end smallexample
5950
5951In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5952unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5953example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5954@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5955
5956When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5957some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5958this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5959@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5960declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5961you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5962
5963If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5964within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5965(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5966specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5967
cb840a31
L
5968You can also specify the language in the version script:
5969
5970@smallexample
5971VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5972@end smallexample
5973
c0065db7 5974The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5975The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5976demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5977patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5978@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5979
86043bbb
MM
5980Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5981described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5982or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5983the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5984whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5985cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5986might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5987should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5988expect when you upgrade.
5989
252b5132
RH
5990@node Expressions
5991@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5992@cindex expressions
5993@cindex arithmetic
5994The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5995that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5996expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5997host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5998
5999You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
6000
6001The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
6002expressions.
6003
6004@menu
6005* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 6006* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 6007* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 6008* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
6009* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
6010* Operators:: Operators
6011* Evaluation:: Evaluation
6012* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
6013* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
6014@end menu
6015
6016@node Constants
6017@subsection Constants
6018@cindex integer notation
6019@cindex constants in linker scripts
6020All constants are integers.
6021
6022As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
6023octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 6024hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 6025@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
6026@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
6027value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
6028
6029@cindex scaled integers
6030@cindex K and M integer suffixes
6031@cindex M and K integer suffixes
6032@cindex suffixes for integers
6033@cindex integer suffixes
6034In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
6035constant by
6036@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6037@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6038@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6039@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
6040@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6041@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6042@tex
6043${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
6044@end tex
6045@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
6046respectively. For example, the following
6047all refer to the same quantity:
6048
252b5132 6049@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
6050_fourk_1 = 4K;
6051_fourk_2 = 4096;
6052_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 6053_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
6054@end smallexample
6055
8a308ae8
NC
6056Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
6057conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
6058
0c71d759
NC
6059@node Symbolic Constants
6060@subsection Symbolic Constants
6061@cindex symbolic constants
6062@kindex CONSTANT
a094d01f 6063It is possible to refer to target-specific constants via the use of
0c71d759
NC
6064the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
6065
6066@table @code
6067@item MAXPAGESIZE
6068@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
6069The target's maximum page size.
6070
6071@item COMMONPAGESIZE
6072@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
6073The target's default page size.
6074@end table
6075
6076So for example:
6077
6078@smallexample
9d5777a3 6079 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
6080@end smallexample
6081
6082will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
6083supported by the target.
6084
252b5132
RH
6085@node Symbols
6086@subsection Symbol Names
6087@cindex symbol names
6088@cindex names
6089@cindex quoted symbol names
6090@kindex "
6091Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
6092and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
6093Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
6094specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
6095keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
6096@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
6097"SECTION" = 9;
6098"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
6099@end smallexample
6100
6101Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
6102to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
6103whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
6104
ecca9871
L
6105@node Orphan Sections
6106@subsection Orphan Sections
6107@cindex orphan
6108Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
6109are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
6110script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
a87ded7b
AB
6111output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
6112in which to place the orphaned input section.
6113
6114If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
6115an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
6116placed at the end of that output section.
6117
6118If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
6119sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
6120name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
6121orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
6122one new output section.
6123
6124If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
6125then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
e299b355
AM
6126in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
6127linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
6128attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
6129sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
6130support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
ecca9871 6131
a05a5b64
TP
6132The command-line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
6133(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}) can be used to control which
c005eb9e
AB
6134output sections an orphan is placed in.
6135
252b5132
RH
6136@node Location Counter
6137@subsection The Location Counter
6138@kindex .
6139@cindex dot
6140@cindex location counter
6141@cindex current output location
6142The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
6143current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
6144location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
6145within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
6146anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
6147
6148@cindex holes
6149Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
6150moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
6151location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
6152and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
6153doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
6154
6155@smallexample
6156SECTIONS
6157@{
6158 output :
6159 @{
6160 file1(.text)
6161 . = . + 1000;
6162 file2(.text)
6163 . += 1000;
6164 file3(.text)
563e308f 6165 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
6166@}
6167@end smallexample
6168@noindent
6169In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
6170located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
6171followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
6172@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 6173@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
6174specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
6175
5c6bbab8
NC
6176@cindex dot inside sections
6177Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
6178current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 6179statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
6180absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
6181however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
6182not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
6183
6184@smallexample
6185SECTIONS
6186@{
6187 . = 0x100
6188 .text: @{
6189 *(.text)
6190 . = 0x200
6191 @}
6192 . = 0x500
6193 .data: @{
6194 *(.data)
6195 . += 0x600
6196 @}
6197@}
6198@end smallexample
6199
6200The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
6201and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
6202the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
6203much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
6204move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
6205and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
6206the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
6207the @samp{.data} output section itself.
6208
b5666f2f
AM
6209@cindex dot outside sections
6210Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
6211output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
6212needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
6213
6214@smallexample
6215SECTIONS
6216@{
6217 start_of_text = . ;
6218 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6219 end_of_text = . ;
6220
6221 start_of_data = . ;
6222 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6223 end_of_data = . ;
6224@}
6225@end smallexample
6226
6227If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
6228not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
6229between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
6230should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
6231blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
6232the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
6233sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
6234statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
6235special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
6236place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
6237as follows:
6238
6239@smallexample
6240SECTIONS
6241@{
6242 start_of_text = . ;
6243 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6244 end_of_text = . ;
6245
6246 start_of_data = . ;
6247 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
6248 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6249 end_of_data = . ;
6250@}
6251@end smallexample
6252
6253This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
6254@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
6255placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
6256assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
6257a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
6258section. So you could write:
6259
6260@smallexample
6261SECTIONS
6262@{
6263 start_of_text = . ;
6264 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6265 end_of_text = . ;
6266
6267 . = . ;
6268 start_of_data = . ;
6269 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6270 end_of_data = . ;
6271@}
6272@end smallexample
6273
6274Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
6275@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
6276
252b5132
RH
6277@need 2000
6278@node Operators
6279@subsection Operators
6280@cindex operators for arithmetic
6281@cindex arithmetic operators
6282@cindex precedence in expressions
6283The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
6284the standard bindings and precedence levels:
6285@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6286@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6287@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6288@smallexample
6289precedence associativity Operators Notes
6290(highest)
62911 left ! - ~ (1)
62922 left * / %
62933 left + -
62944 left >> <<
62955 left == != > < <= >=
62966 left &
62977 left |
62988 left &&
62999 left ||
630010 right ? :
630111 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
6302(lowest)
6303@end smallexample
6304Notes:
a1ab1d2a 6305(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
6306(2) @xref{Assignments}.
6307@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6308@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6309@tex
6310\vskip \baselineskip
6311%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6312\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6313\hrule
6314\halign
6315{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6316height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6317&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6318height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6319\noalign{\hrule}
6320height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6321&highest&&&&&\cr
6322% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 6323&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
6324&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6325&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6326&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6327&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6328&6&&left&&\&&\cr
6329&7&&left&&|&\cr
6330&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6331&9&&left&&||&\cr
6332&10&&right&&? :&\cr
6333&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6334&lowest&&&&&\cr
6335height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6336\hrule}
6337@end tex
6338@iftex
6339{
6340@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6341@dag@quad Prefix operators.
6342@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6343}
6344@end iftex
6345@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6346
6347@node Evaluation
6348@subsection Evaluation
6349@cindex lazy evaluation
6350@cindex expression evaluation order
6351The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6352an expression when absolutely necessary.
6353
6354The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6355address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6356regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6357as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6358
6359However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6360until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6361other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6362for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6363
6364The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6365assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6366allocation.
6367
6368Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6369@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6370
6371If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6372available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6373following
6374@smallexample
6375@group
6376SECTIONS
6377 @{
a1ab1d2a 6378 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
6379 @{ *(.text) @}
6380 @}
6381@end group
6382@end smallexample
6383@noindent
6384will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6385address}.
6386
6387@node Expression Section
6388@subsection The Section of an Expression
6389@cindex expression sections
6390@cindex absolute expressions
6391@cindex relative expressions
6392@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6393@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6394@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
6395Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6396relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6397using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6398value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6399symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6400operations.
6401
abf4be64
AM
6402Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6403section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6404address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6405@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6406functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
6407One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6408(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
6409differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6410versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6411section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6412Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
6413absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6414given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6415everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
6416
6417In the following simple example,
252b5132 6418
7542af2a
AM
6419@smallexample
6420@group
6421SECTIONS
6422 @{
6423 . = 0x100;
6424 __executable_start = 0x100;
6425 .data :
6426 @{
6427 . = 0x10;
6428 __data_start = 0x10;
6429 *(.data)
6430 @}
6431 @dots{}
6432 @}
6433@end group
6434@end smallexample
252b5132 6435
7542af2a
AM
6436both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6437address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6438@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6439section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 6440
5c3049d2
AM
6441For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6442addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
6443
6444@itemize @bullet
6445@item
c05f749e
AM
6446Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6447operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6448absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6449@item
7542af2a
AM
6450Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6451relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6452and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6453@item
c05f749e
AM
6454Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6455in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6456address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6457before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
6458@end itemize
6459
6460The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6461
6462@itemize @bullet
6463@item
6464An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6465@item
6466The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6467@item
9bc8bb33 6468The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 6469relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
94b41882
AM
6470(after above conversions) is also a number when
6471@code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6472but an absolute address otherwise.
9bc8bb33
AM
6473@item
6474The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6475relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6476section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
6477@item
6478The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6479conversions) is an absolute address.
6480@end itemize
252b5132
RH
6481
6482You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6483to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6484create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6485section @samp{.data}:
6486@smallexample
6487SECTIONS
6488 @{
6489 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6490 @}
6491@end smallexample
6492@noindent
6493If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6494@samp{.data} section.
6495
7542af2a
AM
6496Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6497particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6498
252b5132
RH
6499@node Builtin Functions
6500@subsection Builtin Functions
6501@cindex functions in expressions
6502The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6503use in linker script expressions.
6504
6505@table @code
6506@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6507@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6508@cindex expression, absolute
6509Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6510of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6511value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6512normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6513
6514@item ADDR(@var{section})
6515@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6516@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 6517Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 6518script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
6519the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6520@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6521@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6522the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
6523@smallexample
6524@group
6525SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6526 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 6527 @{
252b5132
RH
6528 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6529 @dots{}
6530 @}
6531 .output :
6532 @{
6533 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6534 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6535 @}
6536@dots{} @}
6537@end group
6538@end smallexample
6539
876f4090
NS
6540@item ALIGN(@var{align})
6541@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6542@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6543@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
6544@cindex round up location counter
6545@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
6546@cindex round up expression
6547@cindex align expression
6548Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6549to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6550doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6551arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6552expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
e0a3af22 6553equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
876f4090
NS
6554
6555Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6556next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6557variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6558input sections:
252b5132
RH
6559@smallexample
6560@group
6561SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6562 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6563 *(.data)
6564 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6565 @}
6566@dots{} @}
6567@end group
6568@end smallexample
6569@noindent
6570The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6571a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6572a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6573of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6574
6575The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6576
362c1d1a
NS
6577@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6578@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6579@cindex section alignment
6580Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6581been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6582evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6583the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6584value in that section.
6585@smallexample
6586@group
6587SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6588 .output @{
6589 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6590 @dots{}
6591 @}
6592@dots{} @}
6593@end group
6594@end smallexample
6595
252b5132
RH
6596@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6597@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6598This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6599scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6600section.
6601
2d20f7bf
JJ
6602@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6603@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6604This is equivalent to either
6605@smallexample
6606(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6607@end smallexample
6608or
6609@smallexample
fe6052e1
AM
6610(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6611 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
2d20f7bf
JJ
6612@end smallexample
6613@noindent
6614depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6615for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6616@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6617If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6618memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6619bytes in the on-disk file.
6620
6621This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6622any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6623@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
def5c83c
AM
6624be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for while still
6625running on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}. Note however
6626that @samp{-z relro} protection will not be effective if the system
6627page size is larger than @var{commonpagesize}.
2d20f7bf
JJ
6628
6629@noindent
6630Example:
6631@smallexample
6632 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6633@end smallexample
6634
6635@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6636@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6637This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6638evaluation purposes.
6639
6640@smallexample
6641 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6642@end smallexample
6643
a4f5ad88
JJ
6644@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6645@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6646This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 6647@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6648When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6649does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
def5c83c
AM
6650@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the @var{commonpagesize}
6651argument given to @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}. If present in the linker
6652script, it must be placed between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
6653@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6654padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6655section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6656
6657@smallexample
6658 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6659@end smallexample
6660
252b5132
RH
6661@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6662@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6663@cindex symbol defaults
6664Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
6665defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6666return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
6667default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6668shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6669the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6670existed, its value is preserved:
6671
6672@smallexample
6673@group
6674SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6675 .text : @{
6676 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6677 @dots{}
6678 @}
6679 @dots{}
6680@}
6681@end group
6682@end smallexample
6683
3ec57632
NC
6684@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6685@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6686Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6687
252b5132
RH
6688@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6689@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6690@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6691Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6692Section LMA}).
6693
2e53f7d6
NC
6694@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6695@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6696Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6697@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6698
252b5132
RH
6699@kindex MAX
6700@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6701Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6702
6703@kindex MIN
6704@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6705Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6706
6707@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6708@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6709@cindex unallocated address, next
6710Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6711This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6712use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6713output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6714
3ec57632
NC
6715@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6716@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6717Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6718
ba916c8a
MM
6719@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6720@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6721Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6722value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6723@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6724will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6725can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6726``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6727name.
6728
252b5132
RH
6729@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6730@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6731@cindex section size
6732Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6733been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6734evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6735@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6736@smallexample
6737@group
6738SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6739 .output @{
6740 .start = . ;
6741 @dots{}
6742 .end = . ;
6743 @}
6744 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6745 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6746@dots{} @}
6747@end group
6748@end smallexample
6749
6750@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6751@itemx sizeof_headers
6752@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6753@cindex header size
6754Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6755information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6756this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6757choose, to facilitate paging.
6758
6759@cindex not enough room for program headers
6760@cindex program headers, not enough room
6761When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6762@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6763number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6764addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6765additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6766room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6767the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6768script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6769you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6770command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6771@end table
6772
6773@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6774@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6775@cindex implicit linker scripts
6776If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6777an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6778linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6779linker will report an error.
6780
6781An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6782
6783Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6784assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6785commands.
6786
6787Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6788at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6789read. This can affect archive searching.
6790
6791@ifset GENERIC
6792@node Machine Dependent
6793@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6794
6795@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6796@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6797sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6798functionality are not listed.
6799
6800@menu
36f63dca
NC
6801@ifset H8300
6802* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6803@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6804@ifset M68HC11
6805* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6806@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6807@ifset ARM
6808* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6809@end ifset
6810@ifset HPPA
6811* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6812@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6813@ifset M68K
6814* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6815@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6816@ifset MIPS
6817* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6818@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6819@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6820* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6821@end ifset
2469cfa2 6822@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6823* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6824@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6825@ifset NDS32
6826* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6827@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6828@ifset NIOSII
6829* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6830@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6831@ifset POWERPC
6832* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6833@end ifset
6834@ifset POWERPC64
6835* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6836@end ifset
b4cbbe8f
AK
6837@ifset S/390
6838* S/390 ELF:: @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
6839@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6840@ifset SPU
6841* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6842@end ifset
74459f0e 6843@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6844* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6845@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6846@ifset WIN32
6847* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6848@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6849@ifset XTENSA
6850* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6851@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6852@end menu
6853@end ifset
6854
252b5132
RH
6855@ifset H8300
6856@ifclear GENERIC
6857@raisesections
6858@end ifclear
6859
6860@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6861@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6862
6863@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6864For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6865you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6866
6867@table @emph
6868@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6869@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6870@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6871targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6872program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6873respectively.
6874
6875@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6876@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6877@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6878@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6879sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6880page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6881(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6882@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6883top page of memory).
1502569c 6884
81f5558e
NC
6885@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6886indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6887displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6888the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6889@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6890whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6891range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6892
1502569c 6893@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6894@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6895biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6896which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6897page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6898(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6899@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6900the top page of memory).
6901
6902@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6903@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
690432 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6905changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6906(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6907@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6908the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6909@end table
6910
6911@ifclear GENERIC
6912@lowersections
6913@end ifclear
6914@end ifset
6915
36f63dca 6916@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6917@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6918@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6919@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6920@node Renesas
6921@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6922
c2dcd04e
NC
6923@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6924H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6925options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6926@end ifset
6927@end ifclear
6928
36f63dca
NC
6929@ifset ARM
6930@ifclear GENERIC
6931@raisesections
6932@end ifclear
6933
93fd0973
SC
6934@ifset M68HC11
6935@ifclear GENERIC
6936@raisesections
6937@end ifclear
6938
6939@node M68HC11/68HC12
6940@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6941
6942@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6943
6944@subsection Linker Relaxation
6945
6946For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6947optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6948
6949@table @emph
6950@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6951@item relaxing address modes
6952@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6953targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6954program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6955respectively.
6956
6957@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6958transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6959page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6960
6961@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6962When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6963of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6964addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6965@code{bset} instructions.
6966
6967@end table
6968
6969@subsection Trampoline Generation
6970
6971@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6972@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6973For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6974call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6975will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6976trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6977case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6978point to the function trampoline.
6979
6980@ifclear GENERIC
6981@lowersections
6982@end ifclear
6983@end ifset
6984
36f63dca 6985@node ARM
3674e28a 6986@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6987
6988@cindex ARM interworking support
6989@kindex --support-old-code
6990For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6991between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6992been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6993line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6994libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
a05a5b64 6995option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command-line switch should be
36f63dca
NC
6996given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6997which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6998the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6999non-interworking aware Thumb code.
7000
7001@cindex thumb entry point
7002@cindex entry point, thumb
7003@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
7004The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
7005@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
7006But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
7007branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
7008executing in Thumb mode straight away.
7009
ce11ba6c
KT
7010@cindex PE import table prefixing
7011@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
7012The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
7013the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 7014element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
7015import tables. By default this option is turned off.
7016
e489d0ae
PB
7017@cindex BE8
7018@kindex --be8
7019The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
080bb7bb
NC
7020executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
7021objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
7022option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
7023little-endian code.
e489d0ae 7024
3674e28a
PB
7025@cindex TARGET1
7026@kindex --target1-rel
7027@kindex --target1-abs
7028The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
7029@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
7030or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
7031and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
7032
7033@cindex TARGET2
7034@kindex --target2=@var{type}
7035The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
7036@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
7037meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
7038@table @samp
7039@item rel
eeac373a
PB
7040@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
7041@item abs
7042@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
7043@item got-rel
7044@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
7045@end table
7046
319850b4
JB
7047@cindex FIX_V4BX
7048@kindex --fix-v4bx
7049The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
7050specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
7051interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
7052also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
7053
7054In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
7055linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
7056@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
7057
7058In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
7059relocations are ignored.
7060
845b51d6
PB
7061@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
7062@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
7063Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
7064relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
7065
7066@smallexample
7067TST rM, #1
7068MOVEQ PC, rM
7069BX Rn
7070@end smallexample
7071
7072This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
7073and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 7074condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 7075
33bfe774
JB
7076@cindex USE_BLX
7077@kindex --use-blx
7078The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
7079BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
7080situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
7081code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
7082each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
7083
7084This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
7085specify it if you are using that target.
7086
c6dd86c6
JB
7087@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
7088@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
7089The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
7090bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
7091instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
7092to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
7093the support code can read the intended values.
7094
7095The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
7096intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
7097and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
7098intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
7099full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
7100you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
7101
7102If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
7103enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
7104@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
7105mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
7106vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
7107@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
7108
7109If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
7110potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
7111such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
7112first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
7113instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
7114the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
7115are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
7116
2de70689
MGD
7117@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
7118@kindex --fix-arm1176
7119@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
7120The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
7121in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
7122are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
7123unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
7124
9d5777a3 7125Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 7126Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
7127http://infocenter.arm.com/.
7128
a504d23a
LA
7129@cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
7130@kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
7131
7132The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
7133workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
7134the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
7135off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
7136the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
7137core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
7138integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
7139VPOP. Stores are not affected.
7140
7141The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
7142necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
7143
7144The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
7145@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
7146STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
7147linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
7148@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
7149
7150If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
7151potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
7152such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
7153replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
7154branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
7155then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
7156
7157The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
7158the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
7159
7160The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
7161they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
7162there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
7163occurs.
7164
7165The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
7166PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
7167large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
7168cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
7169occurs.
7170
bf21ed78
MS
7171@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
7172@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 7173The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
7174warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7175enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7176linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
7177using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
7178not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
7179
7180@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
7181@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
7182The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
7183warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7184@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7185linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
7186using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 7187
726150b7
NC
7188@cindex PIC_VENEER
7189@kindex --pic-veneer
7190The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
7191ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
7192is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
7193@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
7194
7195@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
7196@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7197The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
7198code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
7199perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
7200placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
a05a5b64 7201controlled by the command-line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
726150b7 7202The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 7203duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
7204group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
7205code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
7206where they should be placed.
7207
7208The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
7209@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 7210placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
7211branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
7212placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
7213value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
7214exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
7215A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
7216linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
7217from the input sections.
7218
7219The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
7220@samp{N = +1}.
7221
1a51c1a4
NC
7222Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
7223only, because it relies on object files properties not present
7224otherwise.
7225
1db37fe6
YG
7226@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
7227@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
7228@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
7229The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
7230
7231The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
7232
68fcca92
JW
7233@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
7234@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
7235@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
7236The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
7237
7238Please contact ARM for further details.
7239
1db37fe6
YG
7240@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
7241@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
7242@cindex Merging exidx entries
7243The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
7244
7245@kindex --long-plt
7246@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
7247The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
7248which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
7249entries which only support 512Mb of code.
7250
1f56df9d
JW
7251@kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
7252@cindex AArch64 rela addend
7253The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
7254link-time values for dynamic relocations.
7255
4ba2ef8f
TP
7256@cindex Placement of SG veneers
7257All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
a05a5b64 7258Its start address must be set, either with the command-line option
4ba2ef8f
TP
7259@samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7260veneers in memory.
7261
54ddd295
TP
7262@kindex --cmse-implib
7263@cindex Secure gateway import library
7264The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7265specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7266secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7267executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7268
0955507f
TP
7269@kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7270@cindex Input import library
7271The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7272must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7273given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7274in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7275@samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7276library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7277library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7278for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7279specified.
7280
36f63dca
NC
7281@ifclear GENERIC
7282@lowersections
7283@end ifclear
7284@end ifset
7285
7286@ifset HPPA
7287@ifclear GENERIC
7288@raisesections
7289@end ifclear
7290
7291@node HPPA ELF32
7292@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7293@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7294@kindex --multi-subspace
7295When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7296import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7297The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7298stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7299multiple sub-spaces.
7300
7301@cindex HPPA stub grouping
7302@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7303Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7304stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7305@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7306sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7307a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7308the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7309conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7310prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7311A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7312branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7313@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7314@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7315detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7316positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7317
7318Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7319single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7320create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7321large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7322
7323@ifclear GENERIC
7324@lowersections
7325@end ifclear
7326@end ifset
7327
7fb9f789
NC
7328@ifset M68K
7329@ifclear GENERIC
7330@raisesections
7331@end ifclear
7332
7333@node M68K
7334@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7335
7336@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7337@kindex --got=@var{type}
7338The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7339The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7340@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7341the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7342@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7343entries only at non-negative offsets.
7344@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7345entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7346support such GOTs.
7347@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7348output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7349file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7350files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7351
7352@ifclear GENERIC
7353@lowersections
7354@end ifclear
7355@end ifset
7356
833794fc
MR
7357@ifset MIPS
7358@ifclear GENERIC
7359@raisesections
7360@end ifclear
7361
7362@node MIPS
7363@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7364
7365@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7366@kindex --insn32
7367@kindex --no-insn32
7368The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7369microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7370in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7371used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7372or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7373including 16-bit ones where possible.
7374
8b10b0b3
MR
7375@cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7376@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7377@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7378The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7379control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7380@samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7381relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7382calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7383relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7384instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7385or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7386the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7387
833794fc
MR
7388@ifclear GENERIC
7389@lowersections
7390@end ifclear
7391@end ifset
7392
36f63dca
NC
7393@ifset MMIX
7394@ifclear GENERIC
7395@raisesections
7396@end ifclear
7397
7398@node MMIX
7399@section @code{ld} and MMIX
7400For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7401@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7402understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7403can translate between the two formats.
7404
7405There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7406Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7407registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7408equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7409@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7410global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7411this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7412symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7413
7a2de473
HPN
7414Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7415@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7416The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7417of a section.
36f63dca
NC
7418
7419Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7420are left out from an mmo file.
7421
7422@ifclear GENERIC
7423@lowersections
7424@end ifclear
7425@end ifset
7426
7427@ifset MSP430
7428@ifclear GENERIC
7429@raisesections
7430@end ifclear
7431
7432@node MSP430
7433@section @code{ld} and MSP430
7434For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7435will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7436just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7437
7438@cindex MSP430 extra sections
7439The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7440
7441@table @code
7442@item @samp{.vectors}
7443Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7444
7445@item @samp{.bootloader}
7446Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7447in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7448
7449@item @samp{.infomem}
7450Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7451this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7452
c0065db7 7453@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
7454This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7455in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7456
7457@item @samp{.noinit}
7458Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7459
c0065db7 7460The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
7461@end table
7462
7ef3addb
JL
7463@table @option
7464@cindex MSP430 Options
7465@kindex --code-region
7466@item --code-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7467This will transform .text* sections to [either,lower,upper].text* sections. The
7468argument passed to GCC for -mcode-region is propagated to the linker
7469using this option.
7470
7471@kindex --data-region
7472@item --data-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7473This will transform .data*, .bss* and .rodata* sections to
7474[either,lower,upper].[data,bss,rodata]* sections. The argument passed to GCC
7475for -mdata-region is propagated to the linker using this option.
7476
7477@kindex --disable-sec-transformation
7478@item --disable-sec-transformation
7479Prevent the transformation of sections as specified by the @code{--code-region}
7480and @code{--data-region} options.
7481This is useful if you are compiling and linking using a single call to the GCC
7482wrapper, and want to compile the source files using -m[code,data]-region but
7483not transform the sections for prebuilt libraries and objects.
7484@end table
7485
36f63dca
NC
7486@ifclear GENERIC
7487@lowersections
7488@end ifclear
7489@end ifset
7490
35c08157
KLC
7491@ifset NDS32
7492@ifclear GENERIC
7493@raisesections
7494@end ifclear
7495
7496@node NDS32
7497@section @code{ld} and NDS32
7498@kindex relaxing on NDS32
7499For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7500relaxes objects according to these options.
7501
7502@table @code
7503@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7504Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7505
7506@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7507Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7508
7509@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7510Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7511
7512@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7513Export the EX9 table after linking.
7514
7515@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7516Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7517
7518@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7519Update the existing EX9 table.
7520
7521@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7522Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7523
7524@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7525Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7526
7527@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7528Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7529
7530@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7531Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7532@end table
7533
7534@ifclear GENERIC
7535@lowersections
7536@end ifclear
7537@end ifset
7538
78058a5e
SL
7539@ifset NIOSII
7540@ifclear GENERIC
7541@raisesections
7542@end ifclear
7543
7544@node Nios II
7545@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7546@cindex Nios II call relaxation
7547@kindex --relax on Nios II
7548
7549Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7550transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7551which may result in @command{ld} giving
7552@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7553The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7554trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7555outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7556trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7557be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7558larger than 256MB.
7559
7560The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7561is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7562@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7563locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7564source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7565register as a temporary.
7566
7567Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7568relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7569option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7570
7571@ifclear GENERIC
7572@lowersections
7573@end ifclear
7574@end ifset
7575
2a60a7a8
AM
7576@ifset POWERPC
7577@ifclear GENERIC
7578@raisesections
7579@end ifclear
7580
7581@node PowerPC ELF32
7582@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7583@cindex PowerPC long branches
7584@kindex --relax on PowerPC
7585Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7586displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7587@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7588@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7589the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7590section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
7591section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7592@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7593both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7594considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
7595
7596@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7597@table @option
7598@cindex PowerPC PLT
7599@kindex --bss-plt
7600@item --bss-plt
7601Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7602generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7603the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7604writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7605@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7606PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7607compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7608BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7609
016687f8
AM
7610@kindex --secure-plt
7611@item --secure-plt
7612@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7613@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7614when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7615layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7616style BSS PLT.
7617
2a60a7a8
AM
7618@cindex PowerPC GOT
7619@kindex --sdata-got
7620@item --sdata-got
7621The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7622sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7623@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7624section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7625@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7626@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7627@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7628@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7629PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7630pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7631GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7632really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7633
7634@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7635@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7636@item --emit-stub-syms
7637This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7638symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7639
7640@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7641@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7642@item --no-tls-optimize
7643PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7644sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7645disable the optimization.
7646@end table
7647
7648@ifclear GENERIC
7649@lowersections
7650@end ifclear
7651@end ifset
7652
7653@ifset POWERPC64
7654@ifclear GENERIC
7655@raisesections
7656@end ifclear
7657
7658@node PowerPC64 ELF64
7659@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7660
7661@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7662@table @option
7663@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7664@kindex --stub-group-size
7665@item --stub-group-size
7666Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7667by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7668@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7669sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7670a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7671the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7672conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7673prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7674A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7675branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7676@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7677@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7678detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7679positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7680
7681Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7682single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7683create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7684large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7685
7686@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7687@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7688@item --emit-stub-syms
7689This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7690symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7691
7692@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7693@kindex --dotsyms
7694@kindex --no-dotsyms
95421fb9
AM
7695@item --dotsyms
7696@itemx --no-dotsyms
2a60a7a8
AM
7697These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7698in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7699function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7700code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7701properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7702to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7703@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7704dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7705feature.
7706
7ae4ea7d
AM
7707@cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7708@kindex --save-restore-funcs
7709@kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
95421fb9
AM
7710@item --save-restore-funcs
7711@itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7ae4ea7d
AM
7712These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7713provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7714@samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7715function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7716link.
7717
2a60a7a8
AM
7718@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7719@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7720@item --no-tls-optimize
7721PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7722sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7723disable the optimization.
7724
7c9cf415
AM
7725@cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7726@kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7727@kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
9e7028aa
AM
7728@kindex --tls-get-addr-regsave
7729@kindex --no-tls-get-addr-regsave
95421fb9
AM
7730@item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7731@itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
9e7028aa 7732These options control how PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7c9cf415
AM
7733stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7734an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7735@code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
9e7028aa
AM
7736stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables
7737generation of the stub when glibc advertises the availability of
7738__tls_get_addr_opt.
7739Using @option{--tls-get-addr-optimize} with an older glibc won't do
7740much besides slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking
7741an application against an older glibc with the expectation that it
7742will normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7743@option{--tls-get-addr-regsave} forces generation of a stub that saves
7744and restores volatile registers around the call into glibc. Normally,
7745this is done when the linker detects a call to __tls_get_addr_desc.
7746Such calls then go via the register saving stub to __tls_get_addr_opt.
5cebc931 7747@option{--no-tls-get-addr-regsave} disables generation of the
9e7028aa 7748register saves.
7c9cf415 7749
2a60a7a8
AM
7750@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7751@kindex --no-opd-optimize
7752@item --no-opd-optimize
7753PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7754corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 7755the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
7756Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7757
7758@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7759@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7760@item --non-overlapping-opd
7761Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7762@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7763the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7764entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7765
7766@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7767@kindex --no-toc-optimize
7768@item --no-toc-optimize
7769PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7770entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7771reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7772marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7773marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7774relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7775unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7776reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7777discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7778reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7779code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7780optimization.
7781
7782@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7783@kindex --no-multi-toc
7784@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7785If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7786@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7787where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7788entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7789total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7790grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7791TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7792calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7793help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
779464K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7795Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7796
7797@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7798@kindex --no-toc-sort
7799@item --no-toc-sort
7800By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7801happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7802placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7803with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7804referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7805@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7806results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7807off this feature.
7808
7809@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7810@kindex --plt-align
7811@kindex --no-plt-align
7812@item --plt-align
7813@itemx --no-plt-align
7814Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
2420fff6
AM
7815aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
7816boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. A negative value may be
7817specified to pad PLT call stubs so that they do not cross the
7818specified power of two boundary (or the minimum number of boundaries
7819if a PLT stub is so large that it must cross a boundary). By default
7820PLT call stubs are aligned to 32-byte boundaries.
794e51c0
AM
7821
7822@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7823@kindex --plt-static-chain
7824@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7825@item --plt-static-chain
7826@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7827Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7828chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7829chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7830
7831@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7832@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7833@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7834@item --plt-thread-safe
1be5d8d3 7835@itemx --no-plt-thread-safe
794e51c0
AM
7836With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7837lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7838another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7839order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7840memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7841barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7842looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7843seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7844default behaviour.
8b5f1ed8
AM
7845
7846@cindex PowerPC64 ELFv2 PLT localentry optimization
7847@kindex --plt-localentry
7848@kindex --no-plt-localentry
7849@item --plt-localentry
7850@itemx --no-localentry
7851ELFv2 functions with localentry:0 are those with a single entry point,
7852ie. global entry == local entry, and that have no requirement on r2
7853(the TOC/GOT pointer) or r12, and guarantee r2 is unchanged on return.
7854Such an external function can be called via the PLT without saving r2
7855or restoring it on return, avoiding a common load-hit-store for small
7856functions. The optimization is attractive, with up to 40% reduction
7857in execution time for a small function, but can result in symbol
d44c746a
AM
7858interposition failures. Also, minor changes in a shared library,
7859including system libraries, can cause a function that was localentry:0
7860to become localentry:8. This will result in a dynamic loader
7861complaint and failure to run. The option is experimental, use with
7862care. @option{--no-plt-localentry} is the default.
2a60a7a8
AM
7863@end table
7864
7865@ifclear GENERIC
7866@lowersections
7867@end ifclear
7868@end ifset
7869
b4cbbe8f
AK
7870@ifset S/390
7871@ifclear GENERIC
7872@raisesections
7873@end ifclear
7874
7875@node S/390 ELF
7876@section @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
7877
7878@cindex S/390 ELF options
7879@table @option
7880
7881@cindex S/390
7882@kindex --s390-pgste
7883@item --s390-pgste
7884This option marks the result file with a @code{PT_S390_PGSTE}
7885segment. The Linux kernel is supposed to allocate 4k page tables for
7886binaries marked that way.
7887@end table
7888
7889@ifclear GENERIC
7890@lowersections
7891@end ifclear
7892@end ifset
7893
49fa1e15
AM
7894@ifset SPU
7895@ifclear GENERIC
7896@raisesections
7897@end ifclear
7898
7899@node SPU ELF
7900@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7901
7902@cindex SPU ELF options
7903@table @option
7904
7905@cindex SPU plugins
7906@kindex --plugin
7907@item --plugin
7908This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7909
7910@cindex SPU overlays
7911@kindex --no-overlays
7912@item --no-overlays
7913Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7914regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7915@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7916turns off all this special overlay handling.
7917
7918@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7919@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7920@item --emit-stub-syms
7921This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7922symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7923
7924@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7925@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7926@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7927This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7928function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7929on calls to non-overlay regions.
7930
7931@cindex SPU local store size
7932@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7933@item --local-store=lo:hi
7934@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7935the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7936range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7937
c0065db7 7938@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7939@kindex --stack-analysis
7940@item --stack-analysis
7941SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7942unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7943under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7944@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7945@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7946determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7947for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7948for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7949for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7950find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7951and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7952under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7953dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7954is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7955and calls will be given.
7956
c0065db7 7957@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7958@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7959@item --emit-stack-syms
7960This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7961in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7962These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7963functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7964functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7965such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7966The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7967@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7968@end table
7969
7970@ifclear GENERIC
7971@lowersections
7972@end ifclear
7973@end ifset
7974
36f63dca
NC
7975@ifset TICOFF
7976@ifclear GENERIC
7977@raisesections
7978@end ifclear
7979
7980@node TI COFF
7981@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7982@cindex TI COFF versions
7983@kindex --format=@var{version}
7984The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7985TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7986also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7987format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7988header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7989
7990@ifclear GENERIC
7991@lowersections
7992@end ifclear
7993@end ifset
7994
2ca22b03
NC
7995@ifset WIN32
7996@ifclear GENERIC
7997@raisesections
7998@end ifclear
7999
8000@node WIN32
8001@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
8002
c0065db7 8003This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
a05a5b64
TP
8004See @ref{Options,,Command-line Options} for detailed description of the
8005command-line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
8006
8007@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
8008@cindex import libraries
8009@item import libraries
69da35b5 8010The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 8011libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
8012regular static archives and are handled as any other static
8013archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03 8014support for creating such libraries provided with the
a05a5b64 8015@samp{--out-implib} command-line option.
2ca22b03 8016
c0065db7
RM
8017@item exporting DLL symbols
8018@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
8019The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
8020
8021@table @emph
8022@item using auto-export functionality
8023@cindex using auto-export functionality
8024By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
a05a5b64 8025which is controlled by the following command-line options:
dc8465bf 8026
0a5d968e
NC
8027@itemize
8028@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
8029@item --exclude-symbols
8030@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 8031@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 8032@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
8033@end itemize
8034
09e2aba4
DK
8035When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
8036(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
8037symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
8038often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
8039private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 8040options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
8041exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
8042final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
8043
8044If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
8045command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
8046if either of the following are true:
8047
8048@itemize
8049@item A DEF file is used.
8050@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
8051@end itemize
dc8465bf 8052
c0065db7
RM
8053@item using a DEF file
8054@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
8055Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
8056an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
8057exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
8058name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 8059command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
8060
8061@example
8062gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
8063@end example
8064
0a5d968e
NC
8065Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
8066@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
8067
dc8465bf
NC
8068Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
8069
8070@example
4b5bd4e7 8071LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
8072
8073EXPORTS
8074foo
8075bar
8076_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
8077another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
8078var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
8079doo = foo == foo2
8080eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 8081@end example
dc8465bf 8082
7fcab871 8083This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
8084symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
8085alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
8086by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
8087@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
8088@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
8089export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
8090in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
8091symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 8092
6b31ad16
DS
8093The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
8094name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
8095the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
8096
b45619c0
NC
8097When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
8098library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 8099@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 8100executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
8101
8102With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
8103specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 8104non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
8105
8106If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
8107or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
8108filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 8109
4b5bd4e7
DS
8110The complete specification of an export symbol is:
8111
8112@example
8113EXPORTS
8114 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
8115 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 8116 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 8117@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
8118
8119Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
8120@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
8121@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
8122@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
8123Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
8124@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
8125string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
8126
8127The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
8128
8129@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
8130will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
8131by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
8132linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
8133library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
8134
8135@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
8136The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
8137the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
8138@code{*_imp__foo}).
8139
8140@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
8141well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
8142read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
8143variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
8144the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
8145extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
8146application will behave unexpectedly.
8147
8148@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
8149it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
8150symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
de194d85 8151API at runtime or by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
4b5bd4e7 8152the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 8153
4b5bd4e7
DS
8154See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
8155other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
8156
8157@cindex creating a DEF file
8158While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
a05a5b64 8159with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command-line option.
0a5d968e
NC
8160
8161@item Using decorations
8162@cindex Using decorations
8163Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
8164itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
8165declared as:
8166
8167@example
8168__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
8169__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
8170@end example
8171
8172All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
8173any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
8174this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
8175the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
8176
8177Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 8178decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
8179instead:
8180
8181@example
8182__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
8183__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
8184@end example
8185
c0065db7
RM
8186This complicates the structure of library header files, because
8187when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
8188variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
8189code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 8190of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
8191omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
8192@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 8193information.
c0065db7 8194@end table
dc8465bf 8195
2ca22b03
NC
8196@cindex automatic data imports
8197@item automatic data imports
8198The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 8199by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 8200compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 8201issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 8202code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 8203c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 8204initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 8205decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 8206platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
8207command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
8208The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
8209suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
8210trigger the feature's use.
8211
c0065db7 8212auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
8213additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
8214
c0065db7 8215"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
8216documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
8217
c0065db7
RM
8218The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
8219occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
8220One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
8221below.
8222
8223@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
8224For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
8225object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
8226offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
8227field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
8228in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 8229without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 8230The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
8231references.
8232
c0065db7
RM
8233The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
8234be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
8235themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
8236runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
8237compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
8238support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
8239run without error on an older system.
8240
c0065db7
RM
8241@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
8242enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
8243
8244@cindex direct linking to a dll
8245@item direct linking to a dll
8246The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
8247including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 8248libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 8249traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
8250libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
8251function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
8252though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 8253storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 8254tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
8255large or complex libraries when using import libs.
8256
c0065db7 8257Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 8258@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 8259of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
8260perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
8261select the dll instead of an import library.
8262
2ca22b03 8263
69da35b5
NC
8264For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
8265to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
8266
8267@example
45e948fe
NC
8268libxxx.dll.a
8269xxx.dll.a
8270libxxx.a
8271xxx.lib
f6c4d4b1 8272libxxx.lib
69da35b5 8273cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
8274libxxx.dll
8275xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
8276@end example
8277
69da35b5
NC
8278before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
8279
c0065db7
RM
8280(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
8281where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
8282@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
8283file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
8284@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
8285
c0065db7
RM
8286Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
8287@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
8288was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
8289various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
8290could coexist on the same machine.
8291
2ca22b03
NC
8292The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
8293applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 8294libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
8295
8296@example
8297bin/
8298 cygxxx.dll
8299lib/
8300 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 8301 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
8302@end example
8303
c0065db7
RM
8304Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
8305done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
8306
83071. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
8308@example
8309gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8310@end example
2ca22b03 8311
69da35b5
NC
8312However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
8313(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
8314@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
8315not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
8316
2ca22b03
NC
83172. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
8318directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
8319should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
8320making the app/dll.
8321
8322@example
8323ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 8324@end example
2ca22b03
NC
8325
8326Then you can link without any make environment changes.
8327
8328@example
8329gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8330@end example
69da35b5
NC
8331
8332This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8333perfectly legal
8334
8335@example
8336bin/
8337 cygxxx-5.dll
8338lib/
c0065db7 8339 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
8340@end example
8341
dc8465bf 8342Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
8343even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8344@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8345
8346Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 8347wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
8348
83491. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8350work with auto-imported data.
8351
dc8465bf
NC
83522. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8353import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8354symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8355for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8356possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 8357
45e948fe
NC
83583. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8359critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8360in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8361stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8362
69da35b5 8363So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
8364true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8365a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8366binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
8367massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8368requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8369will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 8370
c0065db7 8371@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 8372@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
8373@item adding additional names
8374Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
8375A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8376exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8377when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 8378import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 8379
c0065db7 8380@example
dc8465bf
NC
8381LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8382
8383EXPORTS
c0065db7 8384foo
dc8465bf 8385_foo = foo
c0065db7 8386@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8387
8388The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8389
8390Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8391source code using the "weak" attribute:
8392
c0065db7
RM
8393@example
8394void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 8395void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 8396@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8397
8398See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8399symbols.
8400
8401@item renaming symbols
8402Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 8403kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
8404@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8405DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 8406created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 8407
c0065db7 8408@example
dc8465bf
NC
8409LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8410
8411EXPORTS
8412_foo = foo
c0065db7 8413@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8414
8415The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8416@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 8417@end table
dc8465bf 8418
0a5d968e 8419Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
a05a5b64 8420unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command-line option is used.
0a5d968e 8421If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
8422@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8423that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8424@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8425renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8426to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8427the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8428In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 8429which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
8430
8431@cindex weak externals
8432@item weak externals
8433The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8434weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8435defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8436are three variants of weak externals:
8437@itemize
8438@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8439called lazy externals.
8440@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8441This form is not presently implemented.
8442@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8443implemented.
8444@end itemize
8445As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8446are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8447uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
8448
8449@cindex aligned common symbols
8450@item aligned common symbols
8451As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8452desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8453the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8454carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8455by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8456tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8457but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8458warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 8459
2ca22b03
NC
8460@end table
8461
8462@ifclear GENERIC
8463@lowersections
8464@end ifclear
8465@end ifset
8466
e0001a05
NC
8467@ifset XTENSA
8468@ifclear GENERIC
8469@raisesections
8470@end ifclear
8471
8472@node Xtensa
8473@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8474
8475@cindex Xtensa processors
8476The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8477@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8478specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8479keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8480example, with the command:
8481
8482@smallexample
8483SECTIONS
8484@{
8485 .text : @{
8486 *(.literal .text)
8487 @}
8488@}
8489@end smallexample
8490
8491@noindent
8492@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8493and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8494literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8495interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8496group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8497files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8498and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 8499
43cd72b9 8500@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 8501@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
8502Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8503provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8504is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8505literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8506will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8507location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8508the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8509unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8510@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8511range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8512
8513For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8514to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8515instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8516instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8517instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8518@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8519hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8520By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8521switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8522density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8523instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8524performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8525linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8526a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8527
8528The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8529control the linker:
8530
8531@cindex Xtensa options
8532@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
8533@item --size-opt
8534When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8535more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8536no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8537alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8538preserve the correctness of the code.
8539@end table
e0001a05
NC
8540
8541@ifclear GENERIC
8542@lowersections
8543@end ifclear
8544@end ifset
8545
252b5132
RH
8546@ifclear SingleFormat
8547@node BFD
8548@chapter BFD
8549
8550@cindex back end
8551@cindex object file management
8552@cindex object formats available
8553@kindex objdump -i
8554The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8555These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8556object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8557format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8558it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8559associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8560object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8561(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8562list all the formats available for your configuration.
8563
8564@cindex BFD requirements
8565@cindex requirements for BFD
8566As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8567several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8568BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8569formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8570been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8571BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8572may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8573
8574One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8575mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8576useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8577conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8578
8579@menu
8580* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8581@end menu
8582
8583@node BFD outline
36f63dca 8584@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
8585@cindex opening object files
8586@include bfdsumm.texi
8587@end ifclear
8588
8589@node Reporting Bugs
8590@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
8591@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8592@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 8593
ff5dcc92 8594Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
8595
8596Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8597it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 8598to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 8599work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 8600@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8601
8602In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8603information that enables us to fix the bug.
8604
8605@menu
8606* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8607* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8608@end menu
8609
8610@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 8611@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
8612@cindex bug criteria
8613
8614If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8615
8616@itemize @bullet
8617@cindex fatal signal
8618@cindex linker crash
8619@cindex crash of linker
8620@item
8621If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 8622@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
8623
8624@cindex error on valid input
8625@item
ff5dcc92 8626If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
8627
8628@cindex invalid input
8629@item
ff5dcc92 8630If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
8631may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8632object files are correct.
8633
8634@item
8635If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 8636improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
8637@end itemize
8638
8639@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 8640@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 8641@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 8642@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
8643
8644A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 8645products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
8646recommend you contact that organization first.
8647
8648You can find contact information for many support companies and
8649individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8650distribution.
8651
ad22bfe8 8652@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 8653Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
8654@value{BUGURL}.
8655@end ifset
252b5132
RH
8656
8657The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8658@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8659fact or leave it out, state it!
8660
8661Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8662problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
8663assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8664matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8665the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8666location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8667were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8668into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8669specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 8670and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
8671
8672Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8673the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8674on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
8675
8676Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
8677bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8678respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8679You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
8680
8681To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8682
8683@itemize @bullet
8684@item
ff5dcc92 8685The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
8686the @samp{--version} argument.
8687
8688Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 8689the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8690
8691@item
ff5dcc92 8692Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
8693patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8694
8695@item
8696The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8697version number.
8698
8699@item
ff5dcc92 8700What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
8701``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8702
8703@item
8704The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8705observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8706list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8707sufficient.
8708
8709If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8710and then we might not encounter the bug.
8711
8712@item
8713A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
8714bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8715provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8716bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8717state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8718requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8719we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8720attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
8721
8722If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8723@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8724object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8725@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8726how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8727
8728@item
8729A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8730incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8731
ff5dcc92 8732Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
8733will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8734not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8735a chance to make a mistake.
8736
8737Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8738say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 8739copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
8740C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8741and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8742fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8743you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8744any conclusion from our observations.
8745
8746@item
ff5dcc92 8747If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
8748diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8749@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 8750If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
8751context, not by line number.
8752
8753The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8754sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8755@end itemize
8756
8757Here are some things that are not necessary:
8758
8759@itemize @bullet
8760@item
8761A description of the envelope of the bug.
8762
8763Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8764which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8765changes will not affect it.
8766
8767This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8768will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8769with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8770We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8771
8772Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8773of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8774output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8775less time, and so on.
8776
8777However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8778report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8779
8780@item
8781A patch for the bug.
8782
8783A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8784the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8785a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8786to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8787
ff5dcc92 8788Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
8789construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8790through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8791able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8792fixed.
8793
8794And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8795patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8796help us to understand.
8797
8798@item
8799A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8800
8801Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8802things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8803@end itemize
8804
8805@node MRI
8806@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8807@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
8808To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8809linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
8810alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8811described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8812simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 8813@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
8814linker commands; these commands are described here.
8815
8816In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8817file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8818features to make use of them.
8819
8820You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8821@samp{-c} command-line option.
8822
8823Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8824command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8825blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8826MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8827issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8828
8829Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8830
8831You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8832lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8833The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8834
8835@table @code
8836@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8837@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8838@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8839Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8840the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8841@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8842your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8843script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8844commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8845input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8846@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8847
8848@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8849@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8850Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8851in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8852
8853@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8854
8855@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8856@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8857Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8858@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8859
8860@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8861@item BASE @var{expression}
8862Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8863absolute addresses) in the output file.
8864
8865@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8866@item CHIP @var{expression}
8867@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8868This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8869
8870@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8871@item END
8872This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8873
8874@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8875@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8876Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
dc12032b 8877language, but restricted to S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
252b5132
RH
8878
8879@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8880@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8881Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8882@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8883
8884The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8885same line, with no change in its effect.
8886
8887@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8888@item LOAD @var{filename}
8889@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8890Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8891same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8892command line.
8893
8894@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8895@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8896@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8897MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8898option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8899
8900@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8901@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8902@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8903Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8904order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8905script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8906sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8907file, in the order specified.
8908
8909@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8910@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8911@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8912@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8913Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8914@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8915
8916@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8917@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8918@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8919@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8920You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8921specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8922If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8923@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8924@end table
8925
793c5807
NC
8926@node GNU Free Documentation License
8927@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8928@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8929
370b66a1
CD
8930@node LD Index
8931@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8932
8933@printindex cp
8934
8935@tex
7ca01ed9 8936% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8937% meantime:
8938\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8939\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8940\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8941\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8942\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8943\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8944\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8945\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8946\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8947% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8948@end tex
8949
252b5132 8950@bye
This page took 1.551791 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.